Difference between revisions of "Reference: MSEgui"

From Lazarus wiki
Jump to navigationJump to search
 
(48 intermediate revisions by 3 users not shown)
Line 10: Line 10:
 
=== TMseFormWidget ===
 
=== TMseFormWidget ===
 
Use it in order to insert a tcustomform descendant into another widget at designtime. Does not try to load resources in "create".
 
Use it in order to insert a tcustomform descendant into another widget at designtime. Does not try to load resources in "create".
 +
<pre>
 +
        tmseform descendants ( MainForm, SimpleForm,.. )
  
=== TDockFormWidget ===
+
Client area of the form & parent of its widgets ( against which the widgets
=== TPaintbox ===
+
are placed and colored ) is presented by the "container" property
 +
not "container.frame.clientarea"
 +
 
 +
CanClose is called :
  
How to draw line (or circle) on tpaintbox? In event onpaint:
+
- on receiving "ek_close" by window
 +
- for modal window, on focus change
  
<syntaxhighlight lang=pascal>
+
- within parent window's "CanClose" where all nested windows are  
  procedure tmainfo.paintboxonpaint(const sender: twidget; const canvas: tcanvas);
+
checked for OnCloseQuery & OnClose - if any sets "mr_none" then the parent window
begin
+
can't close as well
  with sender,canvas do begin
+
  drawline(nullpoint,pointty(size),cl_yellow); 
+
- from nested window's "CanParentClose"
  //diagonal line across widget
+
- from own "CanParentClose"
  drawellipse(makerect(makepoint(bounds_cx div 2,bounds_cy div 2), size),cl_red);
 
  //circle (or ellipse) centered in widget                           
 
  end;
 
end;
 
</syntaxhighlight>
 
 
Makepoint and makerect are in msegraphutils.
 
  
=== TEventWidget ===
+
- some componnets build oneself in own "Loaded" procedure :
A widget which publishes all possible events of a twidget. Normally it is better to implement your own specialized descendant of an existing widget instead to use teventwidget.
+
= widget grids
 +
= database access components
 +
= ...
  
=== TButton ===
+
The "form.show" has parameter "transientfor".
* A rectangular clickable area that can show text/bitmap.
+
The window Z-order is above the "transientfor" window. The exact behaviour
- Main properties:
+
depends on the window manager.
Caption: read/write the text that appear on top of it.
+
       
onexecute: read/write the address of a procedure (event handler) to be executed when clicked.
+
        caption
 +
- run-time caption on the title bar
  
=== TStockGlyphButton ===
+
color
=== TRichButton ===
+
- color behind the client ( contaner ) area
=== TLabel ===
 
* Draws a piece of text on the given surface (canvas: screen/printer/bitmap).
 
- Main properties:
 
Caption: read/write the piece of text.
 
  
See also [[Reference:_MSEgui/TLabel|TLabel]]
+
container
 +
- the real parent of form's widgets, <see "tformscrollbox">
  
=== TGroupBox ===
+
cursor
=== TStepBox ===
+
- the mouse over cursor shape
=== TStringDisp ===
 
*A read only version of TStringEdit, difference from TLabel: has a frame around it.
 
-Main properties:
 
Value: read/write the text that are showed.
 
Caption: A label normally describing the purpose or meaning of the presented text, it can be positioned around the frame.
 
  
=== TByteStringDisp ===
+
enabled - "false" disables all child widgets
=== TIntegerDisp ===
 
=== TRealDisp ===
 
=== TDateTimeDisp ===
 
=== TBooleanDisp ===
 
=== TToolBar ===
 
=== TDrawGrid ===
 
=== TStringGrid ===
 
=== TTabBar ===
 
=== TTabPage ===
 
=== TTabWidget ===
 
=== TDockHandle ===
 
=== TDockPanel ===
 
=== TSpliter ===
 
<pre>
 
      A widget very similar to "tspacer" but :
 
- designed to rearrange areas occupied by adjacent widgets
 
- a linked widget may only enlarge by "eating" the opposite one,
 
so the summary area of both widgets don't change
 
- has GUI look ( hatched grip, color etc) switched on by default
 
- facilitates run-time repositioning oneself and linked widgets
 
- linked widgets may even be other splitters, spacers (with their linked widgets ),..
 
 
        Properties:
 
  
- color
+
face
= see {any_widget.color}
+
<see "tfacecomp"> + some more options
  
- cursor
+
font
= see {any_widget.cursor}
+
<see "tfont">
 +
 
 +
frame
 +
<see "tframecomp"> + some more options
 +
 +
icon
 +
<see "timage">
 +
 
 +
mainmenu
 +
<see tmainmenu>
  
- enabled
+
name
= "false" stops user interaction
+
- name to refer when programming
  
- face
+
options:
= see {any_face}
 
  
- frame
+
fo_main
= see {any_frame}
+
- assigns this from as the aplication GUI-face & event receiver
 +
- causes the icon of this form to be icon of the application
  
- colorgrip
+
fo_terminateonclose
= color of grip hatching
+
- causes the application to terminate once the form has closed ( doesn't depend on "fo_main" )
  
- grip
 
= defines hatching pattern of the grip
 
  
* stb_dens(N) : the pattern is of rhombuses, the painted rhombs occupy "N" persents of the grip
+
fo_freeonclose
 +
- causes the form (even being modal) to release its memory on closure or OK-return from "CanClose"
  
* stb_block(N) : the pattern is of squares, painted & unpainted squares are equally sized and
+
fo_defaultpos
both have "N" pixels sides
+
- lets the WM to position the form initially
 
* stb_hatchup(N) : the pattern is of right-tilted lines of 1 pixel width,
 
each "N"-th pixel forms these lines
 
  
* stb_hatchdown(N) : the pattern is of left-tilted lines of 1 pixel width,
+
fo_screencentered
each "N"-th pixel forms these lines
+
- causes the form initially to show in center of the apllication work area
  
* stb_crosshatch(N) : the pattern is of crossing (left & right) tilted lines of 1 pixel width,
+
fo_closeonesc
each "N"-th pixel forms these lines
+
- causes the form to close on "Esc" key pressed ( with MR_ESCAPE & "OnCloseQuery" firing )
  
 +
fo_cancelonesc
 +
- causes the form to close on "Esc" key pressed ( with MR_CANCEL & "OnCloseQuery" firing )
  
- linkbottom/linkleft/linkright/linktop
+
fo_closeonenter
= see {tspacer.*}
+
- causes the form to close on "Enter" key pressed ( with MR_OK & "OnCloseQuery" firing )
  
- options
+
fo_closeonf10
 +
- causes the form to close on "F10" key pressed ( with MR_F10 & "OnCloseQuery" firing )
  
= spo_hmove
+
fo_globalshortcuts
* "true" allows the spliter to move horizontally
+
- allows on-this-form "ao_globalshortcut" actions to trigger
  
= spo_hprop
+
  Notes :
* "true" : keep the left position proportional ( on the ratio of creation time )
+
= shortcuts for modal not "fo_localshortcut" forms are processed by app
to weigth of the client area of parent
+
= shortcuts for "fo_globalshorcut" forms are processed by the owning window
  
= spo_hsizeprop
+
fo_localshortcuts
* "true" : keep width of the spacer proportional ( on the ratio of creation time )
+
- disables triggering shortcuts of on-this-form actions
to weigth of the client area of parent
 
* the width stops shrinking on one set in design time
 
  
= spo_vmove
+
fo_autoreadstat
* "true" allows the spliter to move vertically
+
- for "cs_ismodule" forms, before "OnLoaded" fires, rereads all statvars from the bound stafile/memorystream
  
= spo_vprop
+
fo_autowritestat
* "true" : keep the top position proportional ( on the ratio of creation time )
+
- in "CanClose", after "OnClose" fires [ and before app termination for "fo_terminateonlose" form ],
to height of the client area of parent
+
rewrites all statvars to the stafile/memorystream
 +
- for datamodules, does this before "OnDestroy" fires
  
= spo_vsizeprop
+
fo_savepos
* "true" : keep height of the spacer proportional ( on the ratio of creation time )
+
- saves/restores Z-order, size & scree coordinates of the form
to height of the client area of parent
+
as soon as the stat data are ready
* the height stops shrinking on one set in design time
 
  
= spo_dockleft
+
fo_savestate
* causes the "linkleft" widget to dock to the left border of splitter
+
- for top-level form, saves/restores "VSize", "Active" & "Visible"  
* make sence only if linkleft "widget.bounds_x" less than "splitter.bounds_x"
+
as soon as the stat data are ready
  
= spo_docktop
+
optionswidget
* causes the "linktop" widget to dock to the top border of splitter
+
<see "any widget">
* make sence only if linktop "widget.bounds_y" less than "splitter.bounds_y"
+
optionswindow
 +
<see "any window">
 +
popupmenu
 +
<see "tpopupmenu">
 +
stafile
 +
<see "tstafile">
 +
stavarname
 +
taborder
 +
tag
  
= spo_dockright
+
visible - for a form, only affects its childs widgets
* causes the "linkright" widget to dock to the right border of splitter
 
* make sence only if linkright "widget.(bounds_x+bounds_cx)" more than "splitter.(bounds_x+bounds_cx)"
 
  
= spo_dockbottom
+
Events:
* causes the "linkbottom" widget to dock to the bottom border of splitter
 
* make sence only if linkbottom "widget.(bounds_y+bounds_cy)" more than "splitter.(bounds_y+bounds_cy)"
 
  
!!! Two special cases :
+
activate = to set focused & redraw the invalidated area
  
1. (spo_dockleft = spo_dockright = TRUE) && (linkleft = linkright = the_same_widget) :
+
oncreate
causes the "linkleft" widget to adjust to h-positiion & width of the splitter,
+
- fires before "Loaded" procedure is called
it's even possible that the widget doesn't touch the splitter
+
- fires after creating the widget & its subwidgets but before the final arrangement
 +
- forms arent' yet visible on return
  
(spo_docktop = spo_dockbottom = TRUE) && (linktop = linkbottom = the_same_widget) :
+
  Since "Loaded" procedure hasn't yet worked at this point then
causes the "linktop" widget to adjust to v-position & height of the splitter,
+
database contents, values of widget grid's subwidgets
 +
are invalid in this event ***
  
It's even possible in these cases that the widget doesn't touch the splitter
+
onloaded
 +
- fires once "Loaded" procedure of owns & all form's widgets finishes
 +
- processed  after "OnCreate"
 +
- on finishing, forms aren't yet visible
  
- optionsscale
+
oneventloopstart ( main forms only )
= see {tscalingwidget.optionsscale}
+
- only applicable to main forms
 +
- fires once all application GUI is built and shown
 +
( and ready to user's interaction )
 +
 +
onactivate
 +
- see {any_widget.OnActivate}
  
- optionswidget
+
onenter
= see {anywidget.optionswidget}
+
= see {any_widget.OnEnter}
  
- onactivate, onchildscaled, ondeactivate, ondefocus, onenter, onexit, onfocus,
+
onfocus
  onfontheightdelta, onmove, onpopup, onresize, onshowhint
+
- see {any_widget.OnFocus}
= see "tspacer"
+
  
- onupdatelayout
+
onwindowactivechanged
fires :
+
- fires on :
+
= touching another window even on clicking in a behind-modal window ( or its title bar )
= on creating the splitter
+
= 1-st showing the window
= on any reposition of the linked widgets
+
- reactivating the window
( due to moving the splitter, resizing the parent,.. )
 
</pre>
 
  
=== TSpacer ===
+
onbeforepaint
* a regular widget which creates a kind of positional link between surrounding widgets
+
- fires at the very beginning of "paint", before drawing canvas
* designed to maintain distances between widgets
 
* may have GUI look, caption etc switched off by default
 
* resizing a spacer repositions its linked widgets
 
  
=== TLayouter ===
+
onpaint
* a tspacer descendant designed to (auto)resize or/and move its contained widgets acc to some size/positon dependencies
+
- fires in "paint" procedure, between drawing canvas and contained widgets
* may have GUI look, frame caption etc switched off by default
 
* layouters may be nested to achieve copmplex layouts
 
  
Each layout change/assignment is divided into performing 3 consequent stages :
+
onafterpaint (doafterpaint)
 +
- fires just on return from "paint" procedure
  
==== Stage 1 ====
+
        onapplicationactivechanged
 +
- fires :
 +
= if the application gets/looses input focus
  
Widgets auto resized using the following options:
+
onasyncevent (doasyncevent)
 +
- fires on calling {this_form}.asyncevent(atag) from any place of the application
 +
once delivered by the app even queue
  
<pre>
+
"atag" set by caller(s) helps to branch within "onasyncevent", to identify the caller, etc ***
- if {lao_placex OR lao_placey} :
+
generally, doesn't fire instantly because these events are delivered through the app event queue ***
  
= if {plo_scalesize in optionslayout}  then
 
* widgets with "osk_nopropwith" unset in their "optionsskin" are h-scaled
 
    in the proportion of change of tlayouter's clientwidth
 
* widgets with "osk_nopropheight" unset in their "optionsskin" are v-scaled
 
    in the proportion  of change of tlayouter's clientheight
 
  
For h-resized layouter, the effect looks like :
+
onchildmouseevent
 +
- fires on any mouse activity over its child widget(s) not the (containing) widget oneself
  
|--Widget__1---Widget__2--| => the initial look
+
      for forms, it even fires on enetering "container" therefore it appears as if to be the form itself ***
  
  |--Widget_1--Widget_2--| => the layouter gets narrower
+
onchildscaled
 +
- see {any_widget.OnChildScaled}
  
  |---Widget___1---Widget___2---| => the layouter gets wider
+
onclientmouseevent
 +
- fires on any mouse activity over areas expecting user's mouse input (not titlebars/frames/...)
  
*** both widget sizes & margins are affected ***
+
onclose
*** Widget_N may generally situate on different y-levels ***
+
- fires in "CanClose" if "modalresult <> mr_none"
 
+
 
otherwise :
+
onclosequery
 +
- fires in "CanClose" before "OnClose"
 +
- "mr_none" set on return prevents the window (and its parent) from closing
 +
( "OnClose" is also bypassed )
  
= if lao_scalewidth in optionslayout :
 
* widgets with "osk_nopropwith" unset in their "optionsskin" enters in the mode
 
  ( not applied until the layouter resizes! ) when they are h-scaled in the proportion
 
  as far as clientwidth of the tlayouter changes, then stages 2 & 3 are reapplied
 
  
For h-resized layouter, the effect looks like :
+
ondeactivate
 +
- see {any_widget.OnDeactivate}
  
  |--Single____widget????| => the initial look
+
ondefocus
 +
- see {any_widget.OnDeFocus}
 +
 +
ondestroy
 +
- fires on in-code calling "BeforeDestruction"
  
  |--Single__widget???| => the layouter gets narrower
+
ondestroyed
 +
- fires on return from the form's destructor ( when all resources are freed )
  
  |--Single_______widget?????| => the layouter gets wider
+
onterminatequery
 +
- fires on an attempt to terminate the app
 +
- by setting "var terminate:= false", allows to cancel termination
  
* also, if {lao_scaleleft in optionslayout} then left margins of the widgets
+
Termination by debugger/OS facilities can't be blocked this way ( win32 )***
  with unset "optionsskin.osk_nopropleft" resize too otherwise retain
 
  
= if lao_scaleheight in optionslayout :
+
onterminated
* widgets with "osk_nopropheight" unset in their "optionsskin" enters in the mode
+
- fires for not-yet-destroyed forms, once the app event loop finishes
  ( not applied until the layouter resizes! ) when they are v-scaled in the proportion
+
- may be caused by any closure of the main app form
    as far as clientheight of the tlayouter changes, then stages 2 & 3 are reapplied
+
( app termination, WM/OS facilities, )
  
* also, if {lao_scaletop in optionslayout} then top margins of the widgets
 
  with unset "optionsskin.osk_noproptop" resize too otherwise retain
 
  
*** only widget sizes & margins not distances between them are affected ***
+
onwindowdestroyed
 +
- fires once a descendant window is destroyed
 +
( for a main form, when a modal simple form is closed by any way,.. )
  
</pre>
+
onevent
 +
- fires on receiving an event
 +
= for simple forms, it's only "ek_loaded"
  
==== Stage 2 ====
+
There can be more if the form is connected to object_event sending
 +
components or if the application uses object events, for example by calling
 +
tguicomponent.postcomponentevent. ****
  
Widgets may be auto resized in 5 consequent steps using the following options:
+
onexit
 +
- see {any_widget.OnExit}
  
<pre>
+
onfocusedwidgetchanged
 +
- for a "prev-new" parent-wide focused wigdets pair, fires once installing new focus has finished,
 +
after "OnFocus"
 +
- resends for all contained widgets
 +
- doesn't fire if the "prev-new" pair don't really change
  
1. if plo_syncmaxautosize in place_options :
+
onfontheightdelta
  = all widgets are autosized then their client areas are synchronised to the
+
- see {any_widget.OnFontHeightDelta}
    clientareas of the highest and the widest of the widget
 
  * calls "msegui.syncmaxautosize"
 
  
2. if plo_syncpaintwidth in place_options :
+
onhide
  = the paintwidths of all widgets are synchronized to the widget with the
+
- fires at beginnig of own/parent's
    widest outer frame width ( ex. width of "frame.caption" )
+
= hide
  * mainly makes sense if "lao_alignx" set and {align_glue = wam_start or wam_end}
+
= hidden
    ( see below ) when the widgets will be adjusted in order to fit into the
+
= destroying
    inner client width of tlayouter:
+
= setting "visible:= false"
 +
= closing the window ( receiving event "ek_close",.. )
 +
= calling "window.close"
 +
 +
onidle
 +
- fires everytime when the app GUI event queue gets empty
 +
- to stop calling for a while, set "again" parameter to "false" (the initial value );
 +
 +
DON'T DO ANYTHING AFFECTING THE APP EVENT QUEUE ( MODAL WINDOWS, "ShowMessage", Sleep(N),... ) IN THIS HANDLER.
 +
MODAL WINDOWS CAUSE RECURSION !
 +
 +
A code fragment:
 +
 
 +
again:= i < 5;
 +
if not again then exit;
 +
 
 +
onkeydown
 +
- fires on pressing down a keyboard key over the client area when none of child widgets is focused
 +
 
 +
onkeyup
 +
- fires on releasing a keyboard key over the client area when none of child widgets is focused
  
                                  x-align level         
+
onmouseevent
                                        V               
+
- fires on any mouse activity over the client area
                        +----------------------------------+
 
                        | Widget_1 the_widest_frame_caption|
 
                        | Widget_2 frame_caption2          |
 
                        | Widget_N wider_frame_captionN    |
 
                        +----------------------------------+
 
  
  here, the effect is shown for "cp_right" frame captions
+
onmove
    // otherwise syncronizes to the outer ( of the frame except its caption ) width
+
- see {any_window.OnMove}
    // of the Z-top widget
 
  * calls "msegui.syncpaintwidth"
 
  * paintwidth is the outer width
 
  
3. if plo_syncpaintheight in place_options :
+
onpopup
  = the paintheights of all widgets are synchronized to the widget with the
+
- see {any_widget.OnPopup}
    highest outer frame width ( ex. width of "frame.caption" ).
 
  * mainly makes sense if lao_aligny set and {align_glue = wam_start or wam_end}
 
    ( see below ) the widgets will be adjusted in order to fit into the inner
 
    client height of tlayouter :
 
  
                        +------------------------------+
+
onresize
                        | The_                        |
+
- see {any_widget.OnResize}
                        | tallest_            taller_  |
 
                        | frame_    frame_    frame_  |
 
                        | caption  caption2  captionN | 
 
                        |                              |
 
                        | Widget1  Widget_2  Widget_N |<== y-align level
 
                        +------------------------------+   
 
  
  here, the effect is shown for "cp_topleft" frame captions
+
onshortcut
    // otherwise syncronizes to the outer ( of the frame except its caption )
+
- fires before built-in shorcut processing
    // height of the Z-top widget
+
- "info.eventstate=es_processed" set in "OnShortcut" prevents
  * calls "msegui.syncpaintheight"
+
the event from further auto-processing
+
 
4. plo_synccaptiondistx in place_options :
+
The app
  = causes all widgets to have the widest common room for their cp_(left/right)* frame captions
+
- recognizes & takes registered shortcuts from app event queue
  * calls "msegui.synccaptiondistx"
+
- passes the shocrcut event to each of its windows until the event
+
is processed otherwise processes it by oneself
5. plo_synccaptiondisty in place_options :
+
  = causes all widgets to have the highest common room for their cp_(top/bottom)* frame captions
+
 
  * calls "msegui.synccaptiondisty"
+
onshow
</pre>
+
- fires if the widget is visible:
 +
= on calling "Show" method
 +
= on return from "Loaded" procedure
 +
= on showing the parent widget
 +
- since called at end, allows to adjust the default behavior
 +
 
 +
onshowhint
 +
- see {any_widget.OnShowHint}
 +
 
 +
onstatbeforeread
 +
- fires before loading statvars  from the disk file
  
==== Stage 3 ====
+
onstatafterread
 +
- fires once statvars are loaded from the disk file
  
The widgets may be (re)arranged within the layouter.
+
onstatupdate
 +
- fires at 1-st stage before updating GUI "state/pos" for read statvars
 +
or
 +
- fires at pre-last stage before saving GUI "state/pos"
  
<pre>
+
onstatread
There're 2 modes of such (re)arrangement which can be partially (orthogonally)
+
- fires at 2-nd stage before updating GUI "state/pos" for read statvars
combined (see later):
 
  
1) The place(ment) mode ( lao_place* in optionslayout ) :
+
onstatwrite
 +
- fires at last stage before saving GUI "state/pos"
  
- widgets are placed at some distances between each other, possibly with some
+
pon stat reading, non-minimized visible windows are shown,  
  margins, rooms of invisible widgets ( having visible=false) are also allocated
+
the active window is activated
  unless "plo_noinvisible in place_options"
 
  
   * the widgets are placed in the order of decreasing their "widgetrect.x"
+
</pre>
coordinates before alignment
+
=== TDockFormWidget ===
 
+
=== TPaintbox ===
  * the inter-widget distances and the side margins ( if apllied ) in both
+
 
dimentions are identical and limited between "place_mindist" and
+
How to draw line (or circle) on tpaintbox? In event onpaint:
"place_maxdist"
+
 
 
+
<syntaxhighlight lang=pascal>
  = if {lao_placex in optionslayout} and {place_mode <> wam_none} then the
+
procedure tmainfo.paintboxonpaint(const sender: twidget; const canvas: tcanvas);
following relevant settings apply:
+
begin
 
+
  with sender,canvas do begin
* non-limiting value of "place_maxdist" :
+
  drawline(nullpoint,pointty(size),cl_yellow); 
+
  //diagonal line across widget
# |Widget_1------Widget_2------Widget_3|
+
  drawellipse(makerect(makepoint(bounds_cx div 2,bounds_cy div 2), size),cl_red);
+
  //circle (or ellipse) centered in widget                           
* non-limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {plo_propmargin in place_options} :
+
   end;
+
end;
# |---Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3---|
+
</syntaxhighlight>
+
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_start} :
+
Makepoint and makerect are in msegraphutils.
+
 
# |Widget_1----Widget_2----Widget_3????|
+
=== TEventWidget ===
+
A widget which publishes all possible events of a twidget. Normally it is better to implement your own specialized descendant of an existing widget instead to use teventwidget.
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_start} and
+
 
  {plo_propmargin in place_options} :
+
=== TButton ===
+
* A rectangular clickable area that can show text/bitmap.
# |---Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3???|
+
- Main properties:
+
Caption: read/write the text that appear on top of it.
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_end} :
+
onexecute: read/write the address of a procedure (event handler) to be executed when clicked.
+
 
# |??????Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3|
+
=== TStockGlyphButton ===
+
=== TRichButton ===
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_end} and
+
=== TLabel ===
  {plo_propmargin in place_options} :
+
* Draws a piece of text on the given surface (canvas: screen/printer/bitmap).
+
- Main properties:
# |???Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3---|
+
Caption: read/write the piece of text.
+
 
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_center} :
+
See also [[Reference:_MSEgui/TLabel|TLabel]]
+
 
# |???Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3???|
+
=== TGroupBox ===
+
=== TStepBox ===
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {plo_endmargin in place_options} :
+
=== TStringDisp ===
 +
*A read only version of TStringEdit, difference from TLabel: has a frame around it.
 +
-Main properties:
 +
Value: read/write the text that are showed.
 +
Caption: A label normally describing the purpose or meaning of the presented text, it can be positioned around the frame.
 +
 
 +
=== TByteStringDisp ===
 +
=== TIntegerDisp ===
 +
=== TRealDisp ===
 +
=== TDateTimeDisp ===
 +
=== TBooleanDisp ===
 +
=== TToolBar ===
 +
=== TDrawGrid ===
 +
=== TStringGrid ===
 +
=== TTabBar ===
 +
=== TTabPage ===
 +
=== TTabWidget ===
 +
=== TDockHandle ===
 +
=== TDockPanel ===
 +
=== TSpliter ===
 +
<pre>
 +
      A widget very similar to "tspacer" but :
 +
- designed to rearrange areas occupied by adjacent widgets
 +
- a linked widget may only enlarge by "eating" the opposite one,
 +
so the summary area of both widgets don't change
 +
- has GUI look ( hatched grip, color etc) switched on by default
 +
- facilitates run-time repositioning oneself and linked widgets
 +
- linked widgets may even be other splitters, spacers (with their linked widgets ),..
 
 
# |Widget_1----Widget_2----Widget_____3|, or
+
        Properties:
+
 
# |Widget_1----Widget_____2----Widget_3|, or
+
- color
+
= see {any_widget.color}
# |Widget_____1----Widget_2----Widget_3|, here, the most left amongst
 
widgets having both [an_left,an_right] set is expanded otherwise the most
 
right widget ( Widget_3 in the example )
 
 
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_end} and
 
  {plo_propmargin in place_options} and {plo_endmargin in place_options} :
 
 
 
# |--Widget_1--Widget_____2--Widget_3--|,
 
 
 
The Legend:
 
===========
 
limiting value of "place_maxdist" : such value which produce some visual
 
effect on the layouter
 
 
  "----" :          distance ( = number of minuses, limited by place_maxdis )
 
  "????" :          some remaining space ( = number of questmarks )
 
  "Widget_1" :      widget of the original size
 
  "Widget__..__1" : (auto)resized widget
 
 
 
  = if {lao_placey in optionslayout} and {place_mode <> wam_none} then the things
 
are handled in the same manner as with "lao_placex" but for the vertical
 
"top2bottom" direction of placement instead of the horizontal "left2right" one.
 
  
2) the align(ment) mode ( optionslayout.lao_align* ) :
+
- cursor
 +
= see {any_widget.cursor}
  
- widgets are gathered into a visual group to a dedicated "leader" widget of
+
- enabled
  the layout ( set by "align_leader" and defaults to the lowest in
+
= "false" stops user interaction
  Z-Order = twidget.widgets[0] ) the leader stays in place while the others :
 
  
  = if lao_alignx in optionslayout ( the hor alignment mode ):
+
- face
  * if align_mode = wam_start :
+
= see {any_face}
snap their left borders to the left border of leader
 
  * else if align_mode = wam_end :
 
snap their right borders to the right border of leader
 
  * else if align_mode = wam_center :
 
snap their v-axes to the v-axis of leader after that,
 
  = if lao_aligny in optionslayout ( the vert alignment mode ):
 
  * if align_mode = wam_start :
 
snap their top borders to the top border of leader
 
  * else if align_mode = wam_end :
 
snap their bottom borders to the bottom border of leader
 
  * else if align_mode = wam_center :
 
snap their h-axes to the h-axis of leader
 
  
- after that, the whole widget group can be aligned within the layouter:
+
- frame
 +
= see {any_frame}
  
  = if align_glue =  wam_start
+
- colorgrip
  * if lao_alignx in optionslayout:
+
= color of grip hatching
the left extent of group snaps to the left border of layouter
 
  * if lao_aligny in optionslayout:
 
the top extent of group snaps to the top border of layouter
 
  = else if align_glue = wam_end
 
  * if lao_alignx in optionslayout:
 
the right extent of group snaps to the right border of layouter
 
  * if lao_aligny in optionslayout:
 
the bottom extent of group snaps to the bottom border of layouter
 
  = else if align_glue =  wam_center
 
  * if lao_alignx in optionslayout:
 
the v-axis of group snaps to the v-axis of layouter
 
  * if lao_aligny in optionslayout:
 
the h-axis of group snaps to the h-axis of layouter
 
  
Mutually exclusive settings:
+
- grip
* only one of "align_mode" can be choosen
+
= defines hatching pattern of the grip
* only one of "glue_mode" can be choosen
 
* "optionslayout.lao_alignx" & "optionslayout.lao_placex"
 
* "optionslayout.lao_aligny" & "optionslayout.lao_placey"
 
  
V-alignment ( optionslayout.lao_aligny ) may be combined with h-placement
+
* stb_dens(N) : the pattern is of rhombuses, the painted rhombs occupy "N" persents of the grip
( optionslayout.lao_placex ), and h-alignment ( optionslayout.lao_alignx ) may
 
be combined with v-placement ( optionslayout.lao_placey )
 
  
NOTE:
+
* stb_block(N) : the pattern is of squares, painted & unpainted squares are equally sized and
  The effects of the above described { resizing / placement / alignment } are
+
both have "N" pixels sides
  irreversible. So, the only way to revert is to set "wan_none" then to revert
+
  manually.
+
* stb_hatchup(N) : the pattern is of right-tilted lines of 1 pixel width,
</pre>
+
each "N"-th pixel forms these lines
  
=== TListView ===
+
* stb_hatchdown(N) : the pattern is of left-tilted lines of 1 pixel width,
=== TImage ===
+
each "N"-th pixel forms these lines
<pre>
 
<any image>
 
  
*** Note that switch to the monochrome mode is irerreversible ! ***
+
* stb_crosshatch(N) : the pattern is of crossing (left & right) tilted lines of 1 pixel width,
 +
each "N"-th pixel forms these lines
  
alignment:
 
  
By default, images are top-left aligned, with the original size preserved.
+
- linkbottom/linkleft/linkright/linktop
 +
= see {tspacer.*}
  
al_xcentered = centers the image horizontally
+
- options
al_ycentered = centers the image vertically
 
  
al_right = docks the image to the right border of placeholder
+
= spo_hmove
al_bottom = docks the image to the bottom border of placeholder
+
* "true" allows the spliter to move horizontally
  
al_grayed = fills non-transparent areas with the selected color
+
= spo_hprop
 +
* "true" : keep the left position proportional ( on the ratio of creation time )
 +
to weigth of the client area of parent
  
al_stretchx = adjusts size so that to fill the placeholder in width
+
= spo_hsizeprop
al_stretchy = adjusts size so that to fill the placeholder in height
+
* "true" : keep width of the spacer proportional ( on the ratio of creation time )
al_fit = adjusts size so that to fill the placeholder in both width & height
+
to weigth of the client area of parent
 +
* the width stops shrinking on one set in design time
  
al_tiled = spawns the image & tile the whole  placeholder with the copies
+
= spo_vmove
 +
* "true" allows the spliter to move vertically
  
Interpolation mode while stretching
+
= spo_vprop
 +
* "true" : keep the top position proportional ( on the ratio of creation time )
 +
to height of the client area of parent
  
al_intpol = antialiases as far as the size changes
+
= spo_vsizeprop
(the only working in Linux)
+
* "true" : keep height of the spacer proportional ( on the ratio of creation time )  
al_or = interpolation pixel operation is "or" -> 1's are extended
+
to height of the client area of parent
al_and = interpolation pixel operation is "and" -> 0's are extended
+
* the height stops shrinking on one set in design time
( al_or and al_and only on win32, mainly useful for stretching of monochrome bitmaps) :
 
  
colorbackground = color of image transparent ( masked ) areas in monochrome
+
= spo_dockleft
non-masked mode
+
* causes the "linkleft" widget to dock to the left border of splitter
colorforeground = color of non-transparent areas in monochrome mode 
+
* make sence only if linkleft "widget.bounds_x" less than "splitter.bounds_x"
  
options:
+
= spo_docktop
 +
* causes the "linktop" widget to dock to the top border of splitter
 +
* make sence only if linktop "widget.bounds_y" less than "splitter.bounds_y"
  
bmo_monochrome = fills non-transparent areas with "colorforeground",
+
= spo_dockright
also, in non-masked mode, fills transparent areas
+
* causes the "linkright" widget to dock to the right border of splitter
with "colorbackground"
+
* make sence only if linkright "widget.(bounds_x+bounds_cx)" more than "splitter.(bounds_x+bounds_cx)"
  
bmo_masked = activates built-in image transparency {it "hides" transparent (masked) areas}
+
= spo_dockbottom
bmo_colormask = applies faded edge transparency on the color masked areas in the image
+
* causes the "linkbottom" widget to dock to the bottom border of splitter
 +
* make sence only if linkbottom "widget.(bounds_y+bounds_cy)" more than "splitter.(bounds_y+bounds_cy)"
  
transparency = makes the image transparent as long as enlights areas behind
+
!!! Two special cases :
the image with the selected color
 
  
transparentcolor = for a non-masked image, assigns a color indicate transparency areas
+
1. (spo_dockleft = spo_dockright = TRUE) && (linkleft = linkright = the_same_widget) :
( on matching areas, the image will be seen through )
+
causes the "linkleft" widget to adjust to h-positiion & width of the splitter,  
<pre/>
+
it's even possible that the widget doesn't touch the splitter
  
=== TDial ===
+
(spo_docktop = spo_dockbottom = TRUE) && (linktop = linkbottom = the_same_widget) :
=== TChart ===
+
causes the "linktop" widget to adjust to v-position & height of the splitter,
=== TChartRecorder ===
 
=== TPolygon ===
 
=== TPickWidget ===
 
=== TOpenglWidget ===
 
  
== TWidget stuff ==
+
It's even possible in these cases that the widget doesn't touch the splitter
<pre>
+
 
  Properties:   
+
- optionsscale
- name
+
= see {tscalingwidget.optionsscale}
- anchors
+
 
- bounds
+
- optionswidget
- color
+
= see {anywidget.optionswidget}
- enabled
+
 
- visible
+
- onactivate, onchildscaled, ondeactivate, ondefocus, onenter, onexit, onfocus,
- <face> : see {any face}
+
  onfontheightdelta, onmove, onpopup, onresize, onshowhint
- <frame> : see {any frame}
+
= see "tspacer"
    - hint
+
 
    - helpcontext
+
- onupdatelayout
    - tag
+
fires :
    - taborder
+
    - cursor
+
= on creating the splitter
    - optionswidget
+
= on any reposition of the linked widgets
    - optionsskin
+
( due to moving the splitter, resizing the parent,.. )
    - popupmenu
+
</pre>
   
+
 
twidget's event handlers:
+
=== TSpacer ===
   
+
* a regular widget which creates a kind of positional link between surrounding widgets
- on(de)activate
+
* designed to maintain distances between widgets
- onbeforeupdateskin
+
* may have GUI look, caption etc switched off by default
- onafterupdateskin
+
* resizing a spacer repositions its linked widgets
- onchildscaled
 
- onfontheightdelta
 
- on(de)focus
 
- onenter
 
- onmove
 
- onpopup
 
- onresize
 
- onshowhint
 
     
 
align_glue :
 
  ( outer anchoring mode for widget group, in the align mode )
 
- wam_none
 
- wam_start
 
- wan_center
 
- wm_end
 
  
align_leader :  
+
Properties:
the widget ( incl another spacer, splitter or layouter ) against which the aligment applies ( the reference widget )
 
  
align_mode :
+
- anchors
  ( inner anchoring mode within widget group, in the align mode )
+
= see {any_widget.anchors}
- wam_none
 
- wam_start
 
- wan_center
 
- wm_end
 
  
// Place mode:
+
- bounds
 +
= see {any_widget.bounds}
  
     
+
- color
place_mindist, place_maxdist:
+
= see {any_widget.color}
- in the place(ment) mode, limits distance between widgets
+
 
  ( these distance once calclated also define side margins if aplicable )
+
- enabled
 +
= "false" turns color of the caption to gray
  
place_mode:
+
- visible
  ( outer anchoring mode for widget group, in the place mode )
+
= "true" allows displayable settings (caption text, face, frame etc) to take
- wam_none
+
effect in run-time as well
- wam_start
+
- wan_center
+
- <face>
- wm_end
+
= see {any face}
  
place_options:
+
- <frame>
- plo_endmargin
+
= see {any frame}
= to resize a widget so that it "eats" extra space if it occurs
 
 
* only applicable in the place mode, with a limiting value of "place_maxdist" and:
 
  
  1) {place_mode <> wam_none}
+
- linkbottom
or
+
= widget linked down to most outer edge (incl. frame[.caption]) of the spacer
  2) {place_mode = wam_end} and {plo_propmargin in place_options}
+
- linkleft
 +
= widget linked left to most outer edge of the spacer
 +
- linkright
 +
= widget linked right to most outer edge of the spacer
 +
- linktop
 +
= widget linked up to most outer edge of the spacer
  
For the exact look, see above
+
- dist_bottom, dist_left, dist_right, dist_top :
 +
= margins between most outer edge the spacer
 +
and the corresponding linked widget
  
 +
- options :
  
- plo_propmargin
+
= spao_glueright
= виджеты расставляются теснее так, чтобы образовались отступы перед и после,
 
  причем расстояние между центрами виджетов было бы таким же,
 
  как и растояние между серединами крайних виджетов и соотв. границами зоны расстановки
 
  
- plo_syncmaxautosize
+
  - if "false"
= see above
 
  
- plo_synccaptiondistx
+
h-repositioning or h-resizing the linkleft widget shifts
= see above
+
the whole linked construction, it becomes the only way to h-shift
  
  * affects widgets with opposite cp_left/right set as well
+
if {an_right IN linkright_widget.anchors} then the spacer
  * the minimal before-adjustment "captiondist" amongst all widgets limits "captiondist" for each of the widget
+
may be right-resized with auto h-resizing the linkright widget
              * don't set cfo_captiondistouter here !
+
so that the right margin of that widget is kept
 +
 
 +
if NOT {an_right IN linkright_widget.anchors} then the spacer
 +
may be right-resized with auto h-shifting the linkright widget  
 +
so that width of that widget is kept
  
- plo_synccaptiondisty
+
- if "true"
= see above
 
  
  * affects also widgets with opposite cp_top/bottom set
+
h-repositioning or h-resizing the linkright widget shifts
  * the minimal before-adjustment "captiondist" amongst all widgets limits "captiondist" for each of the widget
+
the whole linked construction, it becomes the only way to h-shift
  
              ! here, don't set "cfo_captiondistouter" for affected widgets !
+
if {an_left IN linkleft_widget.anchors} then the spacer
 +
may be h-resized with auto h-resizing the linkleft widget
 +
so that the left margin of that widget is kept
  
- plo_syncpaintwidth
+
if NOT {an_left IN linkleft_widget.anchors} then the spacer
= see above
+
may be h-resized with auto h-shifting the linkleft widget
 +
so that width of that widget is kept
  
- plo_syncpaintheight
+
= spao_gluebottom
= see above
 
  
- plo_scalesize
+
- if "false"
= see above
 
  
 +
v-repositioning or v-resizing the linktop widget shifts
 +
the whole linked construction, it becomes the only way to v-shift
  
dist_left, dist_right, dist_top, dist_bottom :
+
if {an_bottom IN linkbottom_widget.anchors} then the spacer
= margins between most outer edge the layouter and
+
may be v-resized with auto v-resizing the linkbottom widget
  the corresponding linked widget
+
so that the bottom margin of that widget is kept
  
* see "tspacer" for detail
+
if NOT {an_bottom IN linkbottom_widget.anchors} then the spacer
 +
may be v-resized with auto v-shifting the linkbottom widget
 +
so that height of that widget is kept
  
linkleft,linkright,linktop,linkbottom : see "tspacer"
+
-  if "true"  
  
options:
+
        v-repositioning or v-resizing the linkbottom widget shifts
- spao_glueright, spao_gluebottom:
+
the whole linked construction, it becomes the only way to v-shift
= set the adjustment dependencies between the layouter an its link_* widgets
 
  
* see "tspacer" for more details
+
if {an_top IN linktop_widget.anchors} then the spacer
 +
may be v-resized with auto v-resizing the linktop widget
 +
so that the top margin of that widget is kept
  
// which mode of widget placement to apply - see above
+
if NOT {an_top IN linktop_widget.anchors} then the spacer
optionslayout:
+
may be v-resized with auto v-shifting the linktop widget
- lao_alignx
+
so that height of that widget is kept
- lao_aligny
 
- lao_placex
 
- lao_placey
 
- lao_scalewidth
 
- lao_scaleheight
 
- lao_scaleleft
 
- lao_scaletop
 
 
* lao_place* & lao_align* can't be combined for one direction
 
  
optionsscale:
+
- optionsscale
 
+
= see {tscalingwidget.optionsscale}
  * cause the layouter to provide full space for the widgets as long as they expand/shrink/move
 
  
- osc_expandx
+
- optionswidget
= allocates more h-space if needed
+
= see {anywidget.optionswidget}
  
- osc_shrinkx
+
- onactivate, onchildscaled, ondeactivate, ondefocus, onenter, onexit, onfocus,
= removes extra h-space if occured
+
  onfontheightdelta, onpopup, onresize, onshowhint
 +
= see {any_widget.*}
  
- osc_expandy
+
- onmove
= allocates more v-space if needed
+
= see {any_window.OnMove}
  
- osc_shrinky
+
any "link*" option set disables the spacer to reposition solely,
= removes extra v-space if occured
+
repositioning is only controlled by a "glued" widget since then
  
- osc_invisishrinkx
+
=== TLayouter ===
= fully h-collapses the layouter if "visible=false" ( run-time only )
+
* a tspacer descendant designed to (auto)resize or/and move its contained widgets acc to some size/positon dependencies
 +
* may have GUI look, frame caption etc switched off by default
 +
* layouters may be nested to achieve complex layouts
  
- osc_invisishrinky
+
Each layout change/assignment is divided into performing 3 consequent stages :
= fully v-collapses the layoter if "visible=false" ( run-time only )
 
  
optionsskin:
+
==== Stage 1 ====
= see <any widget>
 
  
 +
Widgets auto resized using the following options:
  
Methods:
+
<pre>
 +
- if {lao_placex OR lao_placey} :
  
constructor create(aowner: tcomponent); override;
+
= if {plo_scalesize in optionslayout}  then
 +
* widgets with "osk_nopropwith" unset in their "optionsskin" are h-scaled
 +
    in the proportion of change of tlayouter's clientwidth
 +
* widgets with "osk_nopropheight" unset in their "optionsskin" are v-scaled
 +
    in the proportion  of change of tlayouter's clientheight
  
<pre/>
+
For h-resized layouter, the effect looks like :
  
== Edit ==
+
|--Widget__1---Widget__2--| => the initial look
=== TStringEdit ===
+
 
=== TMemoEdit ===
+
  |--Widget_1--Widget_2--| => the layouter gets narrower
=== THexStringEdit ===
 
=== TDropdownListEdit ===
 
A tstringedit with a dropdownlist to choose text values. Important dropdown.options members:
 
- deo_autodropdown dropdown on keypress
 
- deo_selectonly don't allow entering arbitrary text.
 
- deo_forceselect don't allow entering empty text.
 
  
=== THistoryEdit ===
+
  |---Widget___1---Widget___2---| => the layouter gets wider
A tstringedit which shows the previously entered values in a dropdownlist for selection.
 
  
=== TIntegerEdit ===
+
*** both widget sizes & margins are affected ***
=== TKeyStringEdit ===
+
*** Widget_N may generally situate on different y-levels ***
Maps string to string.
+
 
 +
otherwise :
  
=== TEnumEdit ===
+
= if lao_scalewidth in optionslayout :
Maps integer to string, zero based and sequencial (first item 0, next 1, ...).
+
* widgets with "osk_nopropwith" unset in their "optionsskin" enters in the mode
 +
  ( not applied until the layouter resizes! ) when they are h-scaled in the proportion
 +
  as far as clientwidth of the tlayouter changes, then stages 2 & 3 are reapplied
  
=== TEnumTypeEdit ===
+
For h-resized layouter, the effect looks like :
A tenumedit which maps Pascal enums to their names. Use oninit to store the typeinfo pointer of the enum type into sender.typeinfopo.
 
  
=== TSelector ===
+
  |--Single____widget????| => the initial look
TSelector  is the most specialized widget of the dropdown editwidget group, it is based on tenumedit (tenumedit maps an integer to a string) and uses for the dropdownlist a second map which must be created on the fly in ongetdropdowninfo. An example is tcommselector where the enumedit maps commnrty to commname and the dropdownlist shows the available RS232 ports
 
only.
 
  
=== TRealEdit ===
+
  |--Single__widget???| => the layouter gets narrower
=== TRealSpinEdit ===
 
=== TDateTimeEdit ===
 
=== TCalendarDateTimeEdit ===
 
=== TEdit ===
 
MSEgui counterpart of Delphi TEdit. You will never use it.
 
  
=== TWidgetGrid ===
+
  |--Single_______widget?????| => the layouter gets wider
=== TItemEdit ===
 
=== TDropDownItemEdit ===
 
A tstringedit with a dropdownlist to choose text values. Important dropdown.options members:
 
- deo_autodropdown dropdown on keypress
 
- deo_selectonly don't allow entering arbitrary text.
 
- deo_forceselect don't allow entering empty text.
 
  
=== TMBDropDownItemEdit ===
+
* also, if {lao_scaleleft in optionslayout} then left margins of the widgets
=== TTreeItemEdit ===
+
  with unset "optionsskin.osk_nopropleft" resize too otherwise retain
=== TRecordFieldEdit ===
 
Used in twidgetgrid in order to edit fields of a ttreeitemedit. Example is MSEide projecttreeform.pas.
 
  
=== TDialogStringEdit ===
+
= if lao_scaleheight in optionslayout :
A tstringedit with an ellipse button. Use "onexecute" to show the dialog.
+
* widgets with "osk_nopropheight" unset in their "optionsskin" enters in the mode
 +
  ( not applied until the layouter resizes! ) when they are v-scaled in the proportion
 +
    as far as clientheight of the tlayouter changes, then stages 2 & 3 are reapplied
  
=== TPointerEdit ===
+
* also, if {lao_scaletop in optionslayout} then top margins of the widgets
=== TSlider ===
+
  with unset "optionsskin.osk_noproptop" resize too otherwise retain
=== TProgressBar ===
 
=== TBooleanEdit ===
 
=== TBooleanEditRadio ===
 
=== TDataButton ===
 
A button with an integer value. Clicking increments the value until "max", then it restarts with "min". Can be inserted into a twidgetgrid. The current value selects the showed image and face by the items of "imagenums" and "valuefaces".
 
  
=== TStockGlyphDataButton ===
+
*** only widget sizes & margins not distances between them are affected ***
=== TDataIcon ===
 
Shows an imagelist item by lookup from "value" to "imagenums". Clicking increments value until "max" then it restarts with "min". Can be inserted into a twidgetgrid.
 
  
=== TTextEdit ===
+
</pre>
Only useful if inserted into a twidgetgrid, builds a text editor, used in MSEide source editor.
 
  
=== TDataImage ===
+
==== Stage 2 ====  
A pixmap display widget which can be inserted into twidgetgrid.
 
  
=== TTerminal ===
+
Widgets may be auto resized in 5 consequent steps using the following options:
Only useful if inserted into a twidgetgrid, builds a very simple terminal emulator. Used in MSEide target console.
 
  
== Properties for all widgets ==
 
 
<pre>
 
<pre>
  
name
+
1. if plo_syncmaxautosize in place_options :
 +
  = all widgets are autosized then their client areas are synchronised to the
 +
    clientareas of the highest and the widest of the widget
 +
  * calls "msegui.syncmaxautosize"
  
anchors
+
2. if plo_syncpaintwidth in place_options :
 +
  = the paintwidths of all widgets are synchronized to the widget with the
 +
    widest outer frame width ( ex. width of "frame.caption" )
 +
  * mainly makes sense if "lao_alignx" set and {align_glue = wam_start or wam_end}
 +
    ( see below ) when the widgets will be adjusted in order to fit into the
 +
    inner client width of tlayouter:
  
-----------
+
                                  x-align level         
 +
                                        V               
 +
                        +----------------------------------+
 +
                        | Widget_1 the_widest_frame_caption|
 +
                        | Widget_2 frame_caption2          |
 +
                        | Widget_N wider_frame_captionN    |
 +
                        +----------------------------------+
  
- they control of design/runtime sticking widgets to their parents
+
  here, the effect is shown for "cp_right" frame captions
 +
    // otherwise syncronizes to the outer ( of the frame except its caption ) width
 +
    // of the Z-top widget
 +
  * calls "msegui.syncpaintwidth"
 +
  * paintwidth is the outer width
  
- dimention pair ( top/bottom or left/right ) both set to "false" cause
+
3. if plo_syncpaintheight in place_options :
the widget to fit the parent's client area in that dimention;
+
  = the paintheights of all widgets are synchronized to the widget with the
this effect may be partial in case of "bounds_c*max" settings limit the extents
+
    highest outer frame width ( ex. width of "frame.caption" ).
 +
  * mainly makes sense if lao_aligny set and {align_glue = wam_start or wam_end}
 +
    ( see below ) the widgets will be adjusted in order to fit into the inner
 +
    client height of tlayouter :
  
*** Return to the look "before dimention fit" is only possible by manual resizing or setting "bounds_*"
+
                        +------------------------------+
-----------
+
                        | The_                        |
an_left
+
                        | tallest_            taller_  |
- on run-time, resizes/shifts left the widget to keep the design-set distance
+
                        | frame_    frame_    frame_  |
between the widget's left border and the left side of parent's client area
+
                        | caption  caption2  captionN | 
as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins
+
                        |                              |
 +
                        | Widget1  Widget_2  Widget_N |<== y-align level
 +
                        +------------------------------+   
  
an_top
+
  here, the effect is shown for "cp_topleft" frame captions
- on run-time, resizes/shifts up the widget to keep the design-set distance
+
    // otherwise syncronizes to the outer ( of the frame except its caption )
between the widget's top border and the upper side of parent's client area
+
    // height of the Z-top widget
as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins
+
  * calls "msegui.syncpaintheight"
 +
 +
4. plo_synccaptiondistx in place_options :
 +
  = causes all widgets to have the widest common room for their cp_(left/right)* frame captions
 +
  * calls "msegui.synccaptiondistx"
 +
 +
5. plo_synccaptiondisty in place_options :
 +
  = causes all widgets to have the highest common room for their cp_(top/bottom)* frame captions
 +
  * calls "msegui.synccaptiondisty"
 +
</pre>
  
an_right
+
==== Stage 3 ====
- on run-time, resizes/shifts right the widget to keep the design-set distance
 
between the widget's right border and the right side of parent's client area
 
as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins
 
  
an_bottom
+
The widgets may be (re)arranged within the layouter.
- on run-time, resizes/shifts down the widget to keep the design-set distance
 
between the widget's bottom border and the lower side of parent's client area
 
as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins
 
  
bounds
+
<pre>
 +
There're 2 modes of such (re)arrangement which can be partially (orthogonally)
 +
combined (see later):
  
cx - width of the widget
+
1) The place(ment) mode ( lao_place* in optionslayout ) :
cxmax, cxmin - design/runtime width of the widget is enforced between "cxmax" and "cxmin"
 
cy - height of the widget
 
cymax, cymin - design/runtime height of the widget is enforced between "cymax" and "cymin"
 
x - distance between the widget's left border and the left side of parent's client area
 
y - distance between the widget's top border and the upper side of parent's client area
 
  
 +
- widgets are placed at some distances between each other, possibly with some
 +
  margins, rooms of invisible widgets ( having visible=false) are also allocated
 +
  unless "plo_noinvisible in place_options"
  
autosize
+
  * the widgets are placed in the order of decreasing their "widgetrect.x"
 
+
coordinates before alignment
-----------
+
 
- only appliable to widgets with "ow_autosize" set
+
  * the inter-widget distances and the side margins ( if apllied ) in both
- the effect may be partial in case when "bounds_c*max" settings limit the extents
+
dimentions are identical and limited between "place_mindist" and
-----------
+
"place_maxdist"
 
+
 
cx - addition to width of the widget (with h-centering post applied)
+
  = if {lao_placex in optionslayout} and {place_mode <> wam_none} then the
cy - addition to height of the widget (with v-centering post applied)
+
following relevant settings apply:
 
+
 
- color
+
* non-limiting value of "place_maxdist" :
= the default color of client area & caption text background
+
= may be overwtitten:
+
# |Widget_1------Widget_2------Widget_3|
* the client area - with "frame.colorclient"
+
* the caption BG - with "frame.font.colorbackground"
+
* non-limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {plo_propmargin in place_options} :
 
+
- font
+
# |---Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3---|
= see {any font}
+
 
+
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_start} :
- frame
+
= see {any frame}
+
# |Widget_1----Widget_2----Widget_3????|
 
+
- face
+
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_start} and
= see {any face}
+
  {plo_propmargin in place_options} :
 
+
- hint
+
# |---Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3???|
= descriptive text appearing when mouse pointer enters the widget
+
 
+
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_end} :
- cursor
+
= shape of the mouse pointer over the client area of widget (run-time only)
+
# |??????Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3|
 
+
- visible
+
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_end} and
= "true" allow the widget to appear ( run-time only )
+
  {plo_propmargin in place_options} :
 
+
- enabled
+
# |???Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3---|
= "true" allows the widget to participate in GUI interaction
+
= "false" disallows the widget & its childs :
+
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_center} :
* processing all events & shortcuts & menu calls
+
* auto "CanClose" check
+
# |???Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3???|
 +
 +
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {plo_endmargin in place_options} :
 +
 +
# |Widget_1----Widget_2----Widget_____3|, or
 +
 +
# |Widget_1----Widget_____2----Widget_3|, or
 +
 +
# |Widget_____1----Widget_2----Widget_3|, here, the most left amongst
 +
widgets having both [an_left,an_right] set is expanded otherwise the most
 +
right widget ( Widget_3 in the example )
 +
 +
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_end} and
 +
  {plo_propmargin in place_options} and {plo_endmargin in place_options} :
 +
 
 +
# |--Widget_1--Widget_____2--Widget_3--|,
 +
 
 +
The Legend:
 +
===========
 +
limiting value of "place_maxdist" : such value which produce some visual
 +
effect on the layouter
 +
 +
  "----" :          distance ( = number of minuses, limited by place_maxdis )
 +
  "????" :          some remaining space ( = number of questmarks )
 +
  "Widget_1" :      widget of the original size
 +
  "Widget__..__1" : (auto)resized widget
 +
 
 +
  = if {lao_placey in optionslayout} and {place_mode <> wam_none} then the things
 +
are handled in the same manner as with "lao_placex" but for the vertical
 +
"top2bottom" direction of placement instead of the horizontal "left2right" one.
  
Also "false" usually aints the widget in color marking
+
2) the align(ment) mode ( optionslayout.lao_align* ) :
the "disabled" state ( usually light gray font color )
 
  
- popupmenu
+
- widgets are gathered into a visual group to a dedicated "leader" widget of
= reference to a preset tpopupmenu widget serving the right-click menu
+
  the layout ( set by "align_leader" and defaults to the lowest in
 +
  Z-Order = twidget.widgets[0] ) the leader stays in place while the others :
  
- taborder
+
  = if lao_alignx in optionslayout ( the hor alignment mode ):
- {0..N} order number when TAB-key cycling through widgets in the container
+
  * if align_mode = wam_start :
 +
snap their left borders to the left border of leader
 +
  * else if align_mode = wam_end :
 +
snap their right borders to the right border of leader
 +
  * else if align_mode = wam_center :
 +
snap their v-axes to the v-axis of leader after that,
 +
  = if lao_aligny in optionslayout ( the vert alignment mode ):
 +
  * if align_mode = wam_start :
 +
snap their top borders to the top border of leader
 +
  * else if align_mode = wam_end :
 +
snap their bottom borders to the bottom border of leader
 +
  * else if align_mode = wam_center :
 +
snap their h-axes to the h-axis of leader
  
- tag
+
- after that, the whole widget group can be aligned within the layouter:
- an integer value bound to this widget instance
 
  
- helpcontext
+
  = if align_glue =  wam_start
= a string returned by "(active/mouse)helpcontext" methods of the owning form
+
  * if lao_alignx in optionslayout:
  when this widget is focued or under mouse in the active window
+
the left extent of group snaps to the left border of layouter
 
+
  * if lao_aligny in optionslayout:
- zorder
+
the top extent of group snaps to the top border of layouter
= reading: finds the current Z-order of the widget's window
+
  = else if align_glue = wam_end
= setting: if the value = 0 then lowers the widget's window in the stacking hierarchy, otherwise rises
+
  * if lao_alignx in optionslayout:
 +
the right extent of group snaps to the right border of layouter
 +
  * if lao_aligny in optionslayout:
 +
the bottom extent of group snaps to the bottom border of layouter
 +
  = else if align_glue = wam_center
 +
  * if lao_alignx in optionslayout:
 +
the v-axis of group snaps to the v-axis of layouter
 +
  * if lao_aligny in optionslayout:
 +
the h-axis of group snaps to the h-axis of layouter
  
 +
Mutually exclusive settings:
 +
* only one of "align_mode" can be choosen
 +
* only one of  "glue_mode" can be choosen
 +
* "optionslayout.lao_alignx" & "optionslayout.lao_placex"
 +
* "optionslayout.lao_aligny" & "optionslayout.lao_placey"
  
optionswidget:
+
V-alignment ( optionslayout.lao_aligny ) may be combined with h-placement
 +
( optionslayout.lao_placex ), and h-alignment ( optionslayout.lao_alignx ) may
 +
be combined with v-placement ( optionslayout.lao_placey )
  
ow_background
+
NOTE:
- keeps the window/widget on bottom of the Z-order stack.
+
  The effects of the above described { resizing / placement / alignment } are
 +
  irreversible. So, the only way to revert is to set "wan_none" then to revert
 +
  manually.
 +
</pre>
  
ow_top
+
=== TListView ===
- keeps the window/widget in foreground
+
=== TImage ===
 +
<pre>
 +
<any image>
  
ow_noautosizing
+
*** Note that switch to the monochrome mode is irerreversible ! ***
- when docking, not to resize for the docking area
 
  
ow_mousefocus
+
alignment:
- "false" here disables focusing the widget with mouse
 
  ( and "OnFocus" doesn't fire on mouse clicks )
 
  
ow_tabfocus
+
By default, images are top-left aligned, with the original size preserved.
- "false" here disables focusing the widget with "TAB" key
 
  ( and "OnFocus" doesn't fire on TAB pressed )
 
  
ow_parenttabfocus
+
al_xcentered = centers the image horizontally
- enters the childs on TAB-focusing then returns to the widget after
+
al_ycentered = centers the image vertically
sequential TAB-ing through its child widgets,
 
otherwise TAB-ing cycles on the childs if entered
 
  
ow_arrowfocus
+
al_right = docks the image to the right border of placeholder
- allows the widget ( and its childs in turn ) to be focused with
+
al_bottom = docks the image to the bottom border of placeholder
the arrow keys
 
  
ow_subfocus, ow_arrowfocusin, ow_arrowfocusout
+
al_grayed = fills non-transparent areas with the selected color
- in case of arrow keys focusing enabled for child-containing widget,
 
determine behaviour on entering & leaving the widget, see the below table:
 
  
ow_subfocus | ow_arrowfocusin | ow_arrowfocusout | effect
+
al_stretchx = adjusts size so that to fill the placeholder in width
 +
al_stretchy = adjusts size so that to fill the placeholder in height
 +
al_fit = adjusts size so that to fill the placeholder in both width & height
  
  FALSE          FALSE            FALSE        entering-/leaving-
+
al_tiled = spawns the image & tile the whole  placeholder with the copies
  FALSE          FALSE            TRUE          entering-/leaving+
 
  FALSE          TRUE              FALSE        entering(nearest)+/leaving-
 
  FALSE          TRUE              TRUE          entering(nearest)+/leaving+
 
  TRUE            FALSE            FALSE        entering(last focused)+/leaving-
 
  TRUE            FALSE            TRUE          entering(last focused)+/leaving+
 
  TRUE            TRUE              FALSE        entering(nearest)+/leaving-
 
  TRUE            TRUE              TRUE          entering(nearest)+/leaving+
 
  
- "entering" is focusing on a child within the widget
+
Interpolation mode while stretching
- "leaving"  is return from last child onto the widget's level
 
- "nearest" is the child closest on the arrow direction
 
- "last focused" is the child focused on last leaving the widget
 
 
*** The Up/Down arrow keys can leave from the childs circle,
 
but Left/Right can only toggle between the childs ***
 
  
*** mouse entering/leaving isn't controllable by these options
+
al_intpol = antialiases as far as the size changes
 +
(the only working in Linux)
 +
al_or = interpolation pixel operation is "or" -> 1's are extended
 +
al_and = interpolation pixel operation is "and" -> 0's are extended
 +
( al_or and al_and only on win32, mainly useful for stretching of monochrome bitmaps) :
  
 +
colorbackground = color of image transparent ( masked ) areas in monochrome
 +
non-masked mode
 +
colorforeground = color of non-transparent areas in monochrome mode 
  
ow_focusbackonesc
+
options:
- on pressing "Esc", returns input focus to the previously focused widget
 
  
ow_noparentshortcut
+
bmo_monochrome = fills non-transparent areas with "colorforeground",
 +
also, in non-masked mode, fills transparent areas
 +
with "colorbackground"
  
*** disables processing of delegated ( from the parent ) shortcuts ***
+
bmo_masked = activates built-in image transparency {it "hides" transparent (masked) areas}
 +
bmo_colormask = applies faded edge transparency on the color masked areas in the image
  
- "true" here disables processing shortcuts if they're delegated
+
transparency = makes the image transparent as long as enlights areas behind
from the parent widget ( obviously, not processed by the parent )
+
the image with the selected color
  
ow_nochildshortcut
+
transparentcolor = for a non-masked image, assigns a color indicate transparency areas
 +
( on matching areas, the image will be seen through )
 +
</pre>
  
*** disables delegating shortcuts to the parent for taking desision ***
+
=== TDial ===
 +
=== TChart ===
  
- if "true" then the widget tries to process it by oneself
+
There are demos here:
otherwise it's passed to the parent widget for further chaining
 
  
*** A shortcut can only be processed once ( by one widget ) ***
+
https://github.com/mse-org/mseuniverse/tree/master/attic/msedocumenting/mse/trunk/help/tutorials/widgets/charts
  
ow_canclosenil
+
=== TChartRecorder ===
- "true" here allows to continue even if there's contained widget(s)
+
=== TPolygon ===
not passing "CanClose" check
+
=== TPickWidget ===
 +
=== TOpenglWidget ===
  
ow_mousetransparent
+
== Edit ==
- "true" here causes the widget oneself ( not its contained ones )
+
=== TStringEdit ===
not to react to mouse events ( just allow them through to the childs )
+
=== TMemoEdit ===
 +
=== THexStringEdit ===
 +
=== TDropdownListEdit ===
 +
A tstringedit with a dropdownlist to choose text values. Important dropdown.options members:
 +
- deo_autodropdown dropdown on keypress
 +
- deo_selectonly don't allow entering arbitrary text.
 +
- deo_forceselect don't allow entering empty text.
  
ow_mousewheel
+
=== THistoryEdit ===
- enables/disables {scrolling/navigating} with wheel of ImPS/2 etc mouse
+
A tstringedit which shows the previously entered values in a dropdownlist for selection.
  
ow_noscroll
+
=== TIntegerEdit ===
- don't use screen image scrolling for twidget.scrollrect,
+
=== TKeyStringEdit ===
redraw the whole scrolled widget rectangle instead;
+
Maps string to string.
sometimes needed with background fades.
 
  
ow_nochildpaintclip
+
=== TEnumEdit ===
-
+
Maps integer to string, zero based and sequencial (first item 0, next 1, ...).
  
ow_destroywidgets
+
=== TEnumTypeEdit ===
- "true" here causes calling "free" for all containing widgets as well
 
  
ow_hinton
+
A TEnumEdit which maps Pascal enums to their names. Use OnInit event to store the typeinfo pointer of the enum type into '''sender.typeinfopo'''.
- to show the hint even in case of hinting is disabled on the parent
 
( "parent.ow_hintoff= true & parent.ow_hinton= false" )
 
  
ow_hintoff
+
<syntaxhighlight lang=pascal>
- "true" here combined with "ow_hinton=false" fully disables displaying the hint
+
procedure tmainfo.enumtypeeditinit(const sender: tenumtypeedit);
 +
begin
 +
  sender.typeinfopo := PTypeInfo(TypeInfo(TMyEnumeratedType));
 +
end;
 +
</syntaxhighlight>
  
ow_multiplehint
+
=== TSelector ===
- "true" here causes the widget to redisplay its hint on each {>3px} move within the widget oneself
+
TSelector  is the most specialized widget of the dropdown editwidget group, it is based on tenumedit (tenumedit maps an integer to a string) and uses for the dropdownlist a second map which must be created on the fly in ongetdropdowninfo. An example is tcommselector where the enumedit maps commnrty to commname and the dropdownlist shows the available RS232 ports
 +
only.
  
*mse ow_timedhint
+
=== TRealEdit ===
- "true" here causes hint of the widget to disappear after a timed inteval (about 2 secs by default)
+
=== TRealSpinEdit ===
 +
=== TDateTimeEdit ===
 +
=== TCalendarDateTimeEdit ===
 +
=== TEdit ===
 +
MSEgui counterpart of Delphi TEdit. You will never use it.
  
ow_fontlineheight (design-time only)
+
=== TWidgetGrid ===
- causes "extraspace" of the last text line to be drawn,
+
=== TItemEdit ===
in turn it causes adjustment of widget height if "ow_autoscale" is set
+
=== TDropDownItemEdit ===
+
A tstringedit with a dropdownlist to choose text values. Important dropdown.options members:
*** makes sence only if "ow_autoscale=true" & ow_autosize=false & "extraspace <> 0" ***
+
- deo_autodropdown dropdown on keypress
 +
- deo_selectonly don't allow entering arbitrary text.
 +
- deo_forceselect don't allow entering empty text.
  
ow_fontglyphheight (design-time only)
+
=== TMBDropDownItemEdit ===
- causes only interline "extraspace"-s to be drawn, opposite to "ow_fontlineheight"
+
=== TTreeItemEdit ===
 +
=== TRecordFieldEdit ===
 +
Used in twidgetgrid in order to edit fields of a ttreeitemedit. Example is MSEide projecttreeform.pas.
  
ow_autoscale (design-time only)
+
=== TDialogStringEdit ===
- causes that if the contents change (design OR run-time) so that its' height changes
+
A tstringedit with an ellipse button. Use "onexecute" to show the dialog.
then the widget will be v-scaled as well
 
  
ow_autosize (design-time only)
+
=== TPointerEdit ===
- causes that widget's heigh & width & client area adjust so that to provide space for contents of the client area
+
=== TSlider ===
- no desing-time change of height/width are possible as long as this option is in effect
+
=== TProgressBar ===
 +
=== TBooleanEdit ===
 +
=== TBooleanEditRadio ===
 +
=== TDataButton ===
 +
A button with an integer value. Clicking increments the value until "max", then it restarts with "min". Can be inserted into a twidgetgrid. The current value selects the showed image and face by the items of "imagenums" and "valuefaces".
  
ow_autosizeanright
+
=== TStockGlyphDataButton ===
- when autosizing & {an_right isn't set}, the design-set right margin against the parent is preserved
+
=== TDataIcon ===
 +
Shows an imagelist item by lookup from "value" to "imagenums". Clicking increments value until "max" then it restarts with "min". Can be inserted into a twidgetgrid.
  
ow_autosizeanbottom
+
=== TTextEdit ===
- when autosizing & {an_bottom isn't set}, the design-set bottom margin against the parent is preserved
+
Only useful if inserted into a twidgetgrid, builds a text editor, used in MSEide source editor.
  
optionsskin:
+
=== TDataImage ===
 +
A pixmap display widget which can be inserted into twidgetgrid.
  
- osc_noskin
+
=== TTerminal ===
- osc_framebuttononly
+
Only useful if inserted into a twidgetgrid, builds a very simple terminal emulator. Used in MSEide target console.
- osc_container
 
  
 +
== NoGui ==
 +
=== TAction ===
 +
<pre>
 +
Shortcut processing order :
 +
 +
- the smallest piece of processing is "doshortcut" procedure which
 +
is called until processed:
 +
= starting from the sender up to the toplevel widget
 +
= then by all child widgets with non-set "ow_noparentshortcut"
 +
= then, if "ow_nochildshortcut" isn't set, by the parent widget
 +
= then by the widget oneself
 +
 +
- "doshortcut" is checked in the following order:
 +
= starting from form's main menu
 +
= then from the owning window ( the widget oneself )
 +
= then from the application
  
Methods:
 
  
  // tmsecomponent
+
*** A shortcut is bound to a widget by :
 +
- placing an action component on the widget ***
 +
- direct assigning the shortcut to the widget (menus,..)
 +
---------------------------
  
// (re)draws the widget according to the related skin if apllicable;
+
caption, color, colorglyph, helpcontext, hint, imagecheckedoffset,
//
+
imagelist <see "timagelist">, imagenr, imagenrdisabled
// also called internally by "loaded" procedure ( before "OnLoaded" code ),
 
// by ShowMessage ( for the internal widgets of the message dialogue ),  
 
// when creating tab & form & menu widgets
 
procedure updateskin(const recursive: boolean = false);
 
  
// TRUE if the instance is created but not yet ready
+
- sets look of "clients" (buttons, menu/toolbar items,..), unless
// for interaction & accessing data & appearance change & receiving events etc
+
these clients have "state.as_local*" set :
// ( the stage between firing "OnCreate" & "OnLoaded" )
 
function loading: boolean;
 
 
{$ifdef FPC}
 
procedure setinline(value: boolean); // ?
 
procedure setancestor(value: boolean); // ?
 
{$endif}
 
  
// TRUE if all conditios are OK for executing the code of "event" ( a handler must be assigned to the event )
+
*** For meaning of these options, see help on the "client" widgets ***
function canevent(const event: tmethod): boolean;
 
  
 +
group
 +
- default value for one-named property of the bound widgets
 +
( menu items,... )
  
// Shortly, replaces the persistent storage of the widget
+
options :
//
+
ao_updateonidle
// if {value <> nil} then
+
- runs this action in cycle, waiting for no gui events everytime
// - if "instance" is nil then calls "createproc" to create the instance,
 
//    then assigns the instance's value:= "value"
 
// otherwise frees "instance"
 
procedure setoptionalobject(const value: tpersistent; var instance;
 
                        createproc: createprocty);
 
  
// creates the persistent storage of the widget via calling "createproc"
+
ao_globalshortcut
procedure getoptionalobject(const instance: tobject; createproc: createprocty);
+
- allows the action to trigger on a non-main form
 +
  (the shortcut is triggered whatever form of the applicatin it was pressed on,
 +
  otherwise only when the form where the aption is placed on is focused )
  
// obtains & puts to "obj" a CORBA interface entry for "aintf" (GUID,...)
+
ao_nocandefocus
function getcorbainterface(const aintf: ptypeinfo; out obj) : boolean;
+
- causes the action not to call "CanDefocus" for focused edit widget of active form
 +
  before executing own code
 +
  ( it helps to avoid the effect of cancelling changes in these widgets
 +
  on activating the bound shortcut )
  
        // TRUE if the widget is owned, or "self" otherwise
+
shortcut
function checkowned(component: tcomponent): boolean;
+
- keyboard combination triggering the action
 +
 
 +
shortcut
 +
- alternative "shortcut" and handled identically
  
        // TRUE if the widget is owner, or "self" otherwise
+
state :
function checkowner(component: tcomponent): boolean;
 
  
// return the top-most widget in owner chain starting from this widget
+
as_disabled
function rootowner: tcomponent;
+
- prevents the action from triggering, also puts the bound widgets to "disabled" look
  
// return the array of owning widgets starting from this widget
+
as_invisible
// componentarty[0] is the widget oneself
+
- in run-time, hides the bound widget, still reacting on the shortcut or direct call
function getrootcomponentpath: componentarty;
 
  
        // returns items of objeclinker ( which notify this widget )
+
as_checked
        // and free notify list ( which are notified by this widget ),
+
- selects the bound menu item if it has "mao_checkbox" option set
        // duplicates are removed.
 
        //
 
        // Notifies mainly relate to insertion/removal operation on widgets
 
        // The notify list is maintained by FreeNotification & RemoveFreeNotification
 
function linkedobjects: objectarty;
 
  
// sends "event" recursively to child widgets until no more childs or
+
as_default
// the event is processed ( cea_processed ) by one of the childs,
+
as_local*
// "event" will be destroyed if destroyevent= true and not async
 
procedure sendcomponentevent(const event: tcomponentevent;
 
                                        const destroyevent: boolean = true);
 
  
// sends "event" to each of owning widgets downward from the root owner,
+
statfile
// "event" will be destroyed if destroyevent= true and not async
+
<see "tstatfile">
procedure sendrootcomponentevent(const event: tcomponentevent;
 
                                        const destroyevent: boolean = true);
 
  
// posts an async "atag"-ged event to be handled by oneself
+
stavarname
procedure asyncevent(atag: integer = 0);
 
  
// posts a "tcomponentevent" instance from sender=self,
+
// "kind" is defined when creating the event,
+
tagaction
// and "tag" may be adjusted after creation
+
onasyncevent
procedure postcomponentevent(const event: tcomponentevent);
+
onchange
 +
onexecute
 +
onupdate
 +
</pre>
  
// returns the classname of the widget if the widget is toplevel,  
+
=== TActivator ===
// and "tmsecomponent" otherwise )
+
=== TCustomLookupbuffer ===
property moduleclassname: string read getmoduleclassname;
+
<pre>
 +
- provides a group of parallel arrays of float(=datetime), integer and widestring types,
 +
and facilities to :
 +
= search in any array
 +
= on found position, quickly obtain corresponding value in another array
 +
- for each type, several arrays  may be kept
 +
- each array is integer-indexed, even string ones ( case[in]sensitive )
 +
- uses two way of accessing arrays data, through :
 +
= physic : array storage index ( row number ) directly
 +
= logical : the integer index ( see above ):
 +
first, physic row number is known for the logical index then the data
 +
are accessed with the found number
  
// returns the classname of the widget as the entry of its constructor
+
*** logical index values are built automatically based on array values,
// ( button => tbutton, datamodule => tdm1mo, form => ttstfo, dbstringedit => tdbstringedit,.. )
+
on updating its data ***
property actualclassname: string read getactualclassname;
+
- dont' have interface to load data ( see its descendants for that )
 +
 +
fieldcountfloat - number of float arrays
 +
fieldcountinteger - number of integer arrays
 +
fieldcounttext - number of widestring arrays
  
// returns "fmsecomponentstate"
+
Event handlers:
// ( a set of cs_ismodule,cs_endreadproc,cs_loadedproc,cs_noload, cs_hasskin,cs_noskin )
+
- onchange
property msecomponentstate: msecomponentstatesty read fmsecomponentstate;
 
  
// returns/sets a pointer associated with the widget
+
Public interface:
// ( contrary to the integer "tag", allows to use an arbitary data type
 
// for associating data )
 
property tagpo: pointer read ftagpo write ftagpo;
 
  
// returns/sets a string identifying the widget in the help system
+
  procedure beginupdate; - marks beginning of "update"
property helpcontext: msestring read gethelpcontext write fhelpcontext;
+
  procedure endupdate; - if all "update" finished, fires "onchange" event
 +
procedure clearbuffer; - clears all arrays then fires "onchange"
 +
 
 +
  procedure checkbuffer;
 +
  - [re]loads the arrays with most actual data
 +
  - just a stub here since doesn't have a data source
 +
 
 +
  function find(const fieldno: integer; const avalue: integer/realty/msestring;
 +
        out aindex: integer; const filter: lbfiltereventty = nil): boolean;
 +
- applies external filtering ("filter" procedure) then incrementally searches integer/realty(datetime) array "fieldno"
 +
for value "avalue" starting from logical index "aindex", returns "true" and the updated logical index
 +
if found else next bigger;
 +
 
 +
  function find(const fieldno: integer; const avalue: msestring;
 +
                out aindex: integer;
 +
                const caseinsensitive: boolean;
 +
                const filter: lbfiltereventty = nil): boolean; overload;
 +
- applies external filtering ("filter" procedure) then incrementally searches widestring array "fieldno" for value "avalue",
 +
in "caseinsensitive" manner, starting from logical index "aindex", returns "true" and the updated logical index
 +
if found else next bigger;
  
// twidget
+
  function findphys(const fieldno: integer; const avalue: integer;
 +
        out aindex: integer; const filter: lbfiltereventty = nil): boolean; overload;
 +
- applies external filtering ("filter" procedure) then incrementally searches integer/realty(datetime) array "fieldno"
 +
for value "avalue" starting from row number "aindex", returns "true" and the updated row number
 +
if found else next bigger;
  
// creates an instance of the widget, owned by "aowner" if not NIL
+
function findphys(const fieldno: integer; const avalue: msestring;  out aindex: integer; const caseinsensitive: boolean;
constructor create(aowner: tcomponent); override;
+
                const filter: lbfiltereventty = nil): boolean; overload;
 +
- applies external filtering ("filter" procedure) then incrementally searches widestring array "fieldno" for value "avalue",
 +
in "caseinsensitive" manner, starting from row number "aindex", returns "true" and the updated row number 
 +
if found else next bigger;
  
destructor destroy; override;
+
The external filtering ("filter") procedure takes the arguments of the caller
 +
togehther with physical row number found in the caller which allows
 +
to check several values at once for that number, within the filter
 +
 +
function integervaluephys(const fieldno,aindex: integer): integer;
 +
-  returns value of integer array "fieldno" at row number "aindex"
 +
             
 +
function integervaluelog(const fieldno,aindex: integer): integer;
 +
-  returns value of integer array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex"
  
// ??
+
function integerindex(const fieldno,aindex: integer): integer;
procedure afterconstruction; override;
+
- returns row number of integer array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex"
  
// rescales the widget frame ( if assigned ) then owned widgets ( if exist, recursively ) then bounds_* then the font ( if assigned )
+
function integerindexar(const fieldno: integer): integerarty;
// called before inserting in parentwidget,
+
- returns all bunch of indexes of integer array "fiedlno"
// calls "scale(ascale)",
 
// no visual repainting
 
procedure initnewcomponent(const ascale: real); virtual;
 
  
// restores the "fontheight" to "font.glyphheight" if "ow_fontglyphheight" or
+
function integerar(const fieldno: integer): integerarty;
// to "font.lineheight" if "ow_fontlineheight" otherwise,
+
- returns all bunch of data of integer array "fiedlno"
// ascale is ignored ?
+
 
// calls "synctofontheight->setfontheight",
+
function floatvaluephys(const fieldno,aindex: integer): realty;
// called after inserting in parentwidget,
+
-  returns value of real/datetime array "fieldno" at row number "aindex"
// no visual repainting
 
procedure initnewwidget(const ascale: real); virtual;
 
  
// creates the widget frame if not yet created
+
function floatvaluelog(const fieldno,aindex: integer): realty;
procedure createframe;
+
-  returns value of real/datetime array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex"
  
// creates the widget face if not yet  created
+
function floatindex(const fieldno,aindex: integer): integer;
procedure createface;
+
- returns row number of real/datetime array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex"
  
// creates the widget font if not yet  created
+
function floatindexar(const fieldno: integer): integerarty;
procedure createfont;
+
- returns all bunch of indexes of real/datetime array "fiedlno"
  
// checks ws_loadlock and csdestroing too
+
function floatar(const fieldno: integer): realarty;
function isloading: boolean;
+
- returns all bunch of data of real/datetime array "fiedlno" 
  
// returns "widgetstatety" - a set of (
+
function textvaluephys(const fieldno,aindex: integer): msestring;
// ws_visible,ws_enabled,ws_active,ws_entered,ws_entering,ws_exiting,
+
returns value of widestring array "fieldno" at row number "aindex"  
// ws_focused,ws_mouseinclient,ws_wantmousebutton,ws_wantmousemove,
+
 
// ws_wantmousefocus,ws_iswidget,ws_opaque,ws_nopaint,
+
function textvaluelog(const fieldno,aindex: integer;
// ws_clicked,ws_mousecaptured,ws_clientmousecaptured,
+
                      const caseinsensitive: boolean): msestring;
// ws_loadlock,ws_loadedproc,ws_showproc,ws_minclientsizevalid,
+
-  returns value of widestring array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex"
// ws_showed,ws_hidden, //used in tcustomeventwidget
 
// ws_destroying,ws_staticframe,ws_staticface,ws_isvisible
 
//
 
// iframe
 
function widgetstate: widgetstatesty;
 
  
// returns "widgetstate1ty" - a set of (
+
function textindex(const fieldno,aindex: integer;
// (ws1_childscaled,ws1_fontheightlock,
+
                      const caseinsensitive: boolean): integer;
// ws1_widgetregionvalid,ws1_rootvalid,
+
- returns row number of widestring array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex"
// ws1_anchorsizing,ws1_isstreamed,
 
// ws1_scaled, //used in tcustomscalingwidget
 
// ws1_noclipchildren,
 
// ws1_nodesignvisible,ws1_nodesignframe,ws1_nodesignhandles,
 
// ws1_nodesigndelete,ws1_designactive,
 
// ws1_fakevisible,ws1_nominsize //used for report size calculations
 
// )
 
property widgetstate1: widgetstates1ty read fwidgetstate1;
 
 
* this set of states is needed because the max FPC set size is 32
 
  thus "widgetstate1ty" can't fit all states
 
  
// TRUE if the widget is contained within another widget
+
function textindexar(const fieldno: integer;
// ( tcomponent stuff )
+
                            const caseinsensitive: boolean): integerarty;
function hasparent: boolean; override;             
+
- returns all bunch of indexes of widestring array "fiedlno"
  
// returns the parent component if it's a widget or the grandparent otherwise
+
function textar(const fieldno: integer): msestringarty;
function getparentcomponent: tcomponent; override//tcomponent
+
- returns all bunch of data of widestring array "fiedlno"    
  
// TRUE if "awidget" is an ascendant or the widget or they are the same widget
+
 
function checkdescendent(awidget: twidget): boolean;
+
function lookupinteger(const integerkeyfieldno,integerfieldno,
+
                                keyvalue: integer): integer; overload;
// TRUE if app is running and the widget owns the caret or the caret widget
+
- returns value of integer array "integerfieldno" at position where
function hascaret: boolean;
+
value of parallel integer array "integerkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
 +
                ( 0 if not found )
  
        // TRUE if "winid" allocated and not loading and not destroying,
+
function lookupinteger(const stringkeyfieldno,integerfieldno: integer;
        // all widgets on a form have "winid" of this form ( a real window allocated by the OS )
+
                        const keyvalue: msestring): integer; overload;
        // thus have this function TRUE
+
- returns value of integer array "integerfieldno" at position where
function windowallocated: boolean;
+
value of parallel widestring array "stringkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
 +
                ( 0 if not found )
 +
 
 +
function lookuptext(const integerkeyfieldno,textfieldno,
 +
                                keyvalue: integer): msestring; overload;
 +
- returns value of integer array "textfieldno" at position where
 +
value of parallel integer array "integerkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
 +
                ( '' if not found )
  
// TRUE if presents a valid toplevelwindow with assigned "winid"
+
function lookuptext(const stringkeyfieldno,textfieldno: integer;
function ownswindow: boolean;
+
                      const keyvalue: msestring): msestring; overload;
 +
- returns value of integer array "textfieldno" at position where
 +
value of parallel integer array "integerkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
 +
                ( '' if not found )
  
// invalidated area of the widget, the origin is "clientpos" against the roor widget
 
function updaterect: rectty;
 
  
// calls recursively "canclose" for all contained widgets ( the widget oneself excluded! ),
+
function lookupfloat(const integerkeyfieldno,floatfieldno,
// TRUE if none of the widgets return FALSE
+
                                keyvalue: integer): realty; overload;
//
+
- returns value of real/datetime array "floatfieldno" at position where
// more specialized widgets may have "canclose" overridden
+
value of parallel integer array "integerkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
// to perform more work than just this call recursion
+
                ( emptyreal if not found )
// ( not null or range check,.. )
 
//
 
// "onclosequery" must also pass the check if assigned, for the function to succeed
 
function canclose(const newfocus: twidget = nil): boolean; virtual;
 
  
        // checks "canclose" first for focused widget of the window ( form,.. )
+
function lookupfloat(const stringkeyfieldno,floatfieldno: integer;
        // if it is a descendant of the widget or the widget oneself,
+
                                keyvalue: msestring): realty; overload;
        // then continues with subwidgets of the widget;
 
        // also - finishes editing ( snapshots "value" ) in the focused widget before checking
 
function canparentclose(const newfocus: twidget): boolean; overload;
 
  
// the above function but with the preserved focus
+
- returns value of real/datetime array "floatfieldno" at position where
function canparentclose: boolean; overload;
+
value of parallel widestring array "stringkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
                  //newfocus = window.focusedwidget     
+
                ( emptyreal if not found )
  
function canfocus: boolean; virtual;
+
function count: integer; - returns number of data rows
function setfocus(aactivate: boolean = true): boolean; virtual;//true if ok
 
procedure nextfocus; //sets inputfocus to then next appropriate widget
 
  
function findtabfocus(const ataborder: integer): twidget;
+
property fieldcounttext: integer; -  returns/sets number of widestring arrays
                      //nil if can not focus
+
property fieldcountfloat: integer; - returns/sets number of real/datetime arrays
 +
property fieldcountinteger: integer; - returns/sets number of integer arrays
  
function firsttabfocus: twidget;
+
the above "fieldcount*" props clear the buffer on setting a value
function lasttabfocus: twidget;
 
function nexttaborder(const down: boolean = false): twidget;
 
  
function focusback(const aactivate: boolean = true): boolean;
+
property integervalue[const fieldno,aindex: integer]: integer; - a shortcut to "integervaluephys"
                              //false if focus not changed
+
property floatvalue[const fieldno,aindex: integer]: realty; - a shortcut to "floatvaluephys"
 +
property textvalue[const fieldno,aindex: integer]: msestring; - a shortcut to "textvaluephys"
  
function parentcolor: colorty;
+
property onchange: notifyeventty;  
function actualcolor: colorty; virtual;
+
- called in "changed" wich in turn is called in :
function actualopaquecolor: colorty;
+
= clearbuffer
function backgroundcolor: colorty;
+
= endupdate
function translatecolor(const acolor: colorty): colorty;
+
= doasyncevent
 +
= loaded
 +
= tlookupbuffer.addrow
 +
 
 +
</pre>
  
procedure widgetevent(const event: twidgetevent); virtual;
+
=== TLookupBuffer ===
 +
<pre>
 +
tlookupbuffer = class(tcustomlookupbuffer)
  
procedure sendwidgetevent(const event: twidgetevent);
+
- extends "tcustomlookupbuffer" with methods of run-time data filling
                              //event will be destroyed
 
  
procedure release; override;
+
- see <tcustomlookupbuffer>
  
function show(const modal: boolean = false;
+
+= Extentions to the public interface:
            const transientfor: twindow = nil): modalresultty; virtual;
 
  
procedure hide;
+
procedure addrow(const integervalues: array of integer;
procedure activate(const abringtofront: boolean = true); virtual;
+
                    const textvalues: array of msestring;
                            //show and setfocus
+
                    const floatvalues: array of realty);
  
procedure bringtofront;
+
- adds one row to each of widestring arrays, integer arrays and real/datetime arrays,
procedure sendtoback;
+
array size of  "{type}values" equals to number of {type} arrays
procedure stackunder(const predecessor: twidget);
 
  
procedure paint(const canvas: tcanvas); virtual;
+
  procedure addrows(const integervalues: array of integerarty;
procedure update; virtual;
+
                    const textvalues: array of msestringarty;
procedure scrollwidgets(const dist: pointty);
+
                    const floatvalues: array of realarty);
  
procedure scrollrect(const dist: pointty; const rect: rectty; scrollcaret: boolean);
+
- adds many data rows  to each of widestring arrays, integer arrays and real/datetime arrays,
                            //origin = paintrect.pos
+
only min length of the input data arrays are inserted, longer data are truncated
 +
array size of  "{type}values" equals to number of {type} arrays and the size of "{type}values[i]"
 +
describes number od data elements in the array
 +
 +
</pre>
  
procedure scroll(const dist: pointty);
+
=== TDBLookupBuffer ===
                            //scrolls paintrect and widgets
+
<pre>
 +
tdblookupbuffer = class(tcustomdblookupbuffer -> tcustomlookupbuffer)
  
procedure getcaret;
+
- extends "tcustomlookupbuffer" with interface to fill arrays with DB-data
procedure scrollcaret(const dist: pointty);
+
- see <tcustomlookupbuffer> & <tcustomdblookupbuffer>
function mousecaptured: boolean;
 
procedure capturemouse(grab: boolean = true);
 
procedure releasemouse;
 
procedure capturekeyboard;
 
procedure releasekeyboard;
 
procedure synctofontheight; virtual;
 
  
procedure dragevent(var info: draginfoty); virtual;
+
Extentions to the public interface:
procedure dochildscaled(const sender: twidget); virtual;
 
  
procedure invalidatewidget;     //invalidates whole widget
+
  procedure checkbuffer; - if data obsolete ("invalid") then reloads them from "datasource"
procedure invalidate;           //invalidates clientrect
+
 
procedure invalidaterect(const rect: rectty; org: originty = org_client);
+
property datasource: tdatasource; - sets/returns DB data source where to load data from
procedure invalidateframestate;
+
property textfields: tdbfieldnamearrayprop; - allows to assign a {datasource:datafield} to each of widestring arrays
 +
property integerfields: tdbfieldnamearrayprop; - allows to assign a {datasource:datafield} to each of integer arrays
 +
property floatfields: tdbfieldnamearrayprop; - allows to assign a {datasource:datafield} to each of real/datetime arrays
  
procedure invalidateframestaterect(const rect: rectty;  
+
property optionsdb: lbdboptionsty; - tunes some DB behaviour apects
                                        const org: originty = org_client)
+
- olbdb_closedataset :  
function hasoverlappingsiblings(arect: rectty): boolean; //origin = pos
+
= once data obsolete, opens (if needed) the supplier dataset (disabling its bound controls)  
 +
then [re]loads data from it then closes it
  
function window: twindow;
+
- olbdb_invalidateifmodified :
function rootwidget: twidget;
+
= gets marked "invalid" once contents of the bound dataset change,
 +
it signals to reload the buffer with the new data just before next accessing
 +
( for any purpose - searching, lookuping, getting value/(array of values),..)
  
function parentofcontainer: twidget;
+
</pre>
            //parentwidget.parentwidget if parentwidget has not ws_iswidget,
 
            //parentwidget otherwise
 
  
property parentwidget: twidget read fparentwidget write setparentwidget;
+
=== TDBmemoLookupbuffer ===
function getrootwidgetpath: widgetarty; //root widget is last
+
<pre>
 +
- allows to use  for lookup-ing any text-convertable DB-fields
 +
- an analog of tdblookupbuffer, but :
 +
- "integerfields" may be names of any integer-convertable DB-fields
 +
- "floatfields" may be names of any (real/datetime)-convertable DB-fields
 +
- "textfields"  may be names of any text-presentable DB-fields
  
// number of contained widgets ( the widget oneself excluded ! )
+
- each DB-field value ( presenting a memo generally of many lines ) may supply many data rows at once
function widgetcount: integer;
+
to the bound array of the buffer, since this value will be internally splitted & turned into native array values,
 +
and the resulting "count" (arrays row count) of the whole buffer will be the minimal rows count amongst arrays
 +
of the buffer, the rest data are truncated
  
function parentwidgetindex: integer; //index in parentwidget.widgets, -1 if none
+
- when loading widestring arrays, also checks for & performs "utf8-to-widestring" conversion of values of
property widgets[const index: integer]: twidget read getwidgets;
+
the bound DB-fields so that these arrays always store widestrings
function widgetatpos(var info: widgetatposinfoty): twidget; overload;
+
</pre>
function widgetatpos(const pos: pointty): twidget; overload;
 
  
function widgetatpos(const pos: pointty;  
+
=== TThreadComp ===
                  const state: widgetstatesty): twidget; overload;
+
=== TStatFile ===
 
+
<pre>
property taborderedwidgets: widgetarty read gettaborderedwidgets;
+
- so that to be in effect, it should also be assigned to the form where the widget using the stafile is placed on
 +
- in design, if "onstatwrite" is set and "filedir" is not yet created, deactivate exception "ECreateError" in project settings ( "Debugger" tab )
 +
- "filedir" may contain "~/" indicating the user's home directory
 +
- options "oe_savestate" & "oe_savevalue" of "client" widgets define what to store to the file
 +
- position etc changes or/and value changes
 +
- in case when a main form shares its stafile with non-main forms, on creating non-main ones, just edited not saved data of the main form ( bound to vars of the statfile) are reset to values read from the statfile upon creating the form; for "sfo_memory", this effect absents unless widgets on the concurring forms share same variable[s]; to avoid this behaviour, disable "fo_autoreadstat" & "fo_autowritestat" of the non-main forms
 +
- each "tstafile" owns:
 +
= tstatwriter:
 +
* provides methods of writing sections & statvars to a memory/file stream
 +
- tstatreader:
 +
* holds list of sections with statvars each
 +
* provides search & check & reading interface to the statvars
 +
* provides reading statvars from a memory/file stream
  
function findtagwidget(const atag: integer; const aclass: widgetclassty): twidget;
+
Positioning to a section speeds up accessing its statvars
              //returns first matching descendent
 
  
property container: twidget read getcontainer;
+
- there also is "tstatfiler" ( exposed by some "tstatfile" events ) which:
function containeroffset: pointty;
+
= may present or "tstatwriter" or "tstatreader" ( there's a check method )
function childrencount: integer; virtual;
+
= provides directionless "update" methods with internal switch to needed direction of processing
property children[const index: integer]: twidget read getchildwidgets; default;
+
- "reading" or "writing" statvars on per-section basis
  
function childatpos(const pos: pointty;
 
                  const clientorigin: boolean = true): twidget; virtual;
 
  
function getsortxchildren: widgetarty;
+
activator :
function getsortychildren: widgetarty;
+
<see tactivator> : NOT YET DONE
property focusedchild: twidget read ffocusedchild;
 
property focusedchildbefore: twidget read ffocusedchildbefore;
 
  
function mouseeventwidget(const info: mouseeventinfoty): twidget;
+
encoding = "en_utf8" selected here, allows to store non-Latin text in the file
 +
      filedir = directory where to keep the file ( by default - the current working directory )
 +
filename = name of the file
  
function checkdescendent(widget: twidget): boolean;
+
options:
                    //true if widget is descendent or self
+
sfo_memory = reads & writes not from a disk file but from a named memory stream
 +
( there's an exclusion - see below "sfo_savedata" ),
 +
mostly useful for presenting last used values on recalling
 +
non-main forms etc ( data even survive recreating forms),
 +
or even for data "exchange" between non-main modal( non-concurring ) forms
 +
in case of the target widgets share same statvarnames
  
function checkancestor(widget: twidget): boolean;
+
sfo_createpath = creates "filedir" if necessary
                    //true if widget is ancestor or self
+
sfo_savedata = used only with "sfo_memory", commands to save
 +
the memory data to the master statfile (see below)
  
function containswidget(awidget: twidget): boolean;
+
sfo_activatorread = activator activate triggers reading ???
 +
sfo_activatorwrite = activator deactivate triggers writing ???
  
procedure insertwidget(const awidget: twidget); overload;
+
statfile = a master statfile
 +
statvarname = name of section of this file in the upper statfile
 +
Tag = an integer property for misc purposes
  
procedure insertwidget(const awidget: twidget; const apos: pointty); overload; virtual;
+
Event handlers:
                //widget can be child
+
onstatafterread - fires on return from "readstat"
 +
onstatafterwrite - fires on return from "writestat"
 +
onstatbeforeread - fires on beginning of "readstat"
 +
onstatbeforewrite - fires on beginning of "writestat"
 +
onstatread = fires after reading state data
 +
onstatwrite = fires after writing state data
 +
onstatupdate = fires after reading/writing state data just before
 +
"onstatread" & "onstatwrite"
  
function iswidgetclick(const info: mouseeventinfoty; const caption: boolean = false): boolean;
+
Public methods:
//true if eventtype = et_butonrelease, button is mb_left, clicked and pos in clientrect
 
//or in frame.caption if caption = true, origin = pos
 
  
function isclick(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
+
  procedure initnewcomponent(const ascale: real); override;
//true if eventtype = et_butonrelease, button is mb_left, clicked and pos in clientrect
+
  - does nothing but fixes the default file name as the statfile default
 +
 
 +
  procedure readstat(stream: ttextstream = nil); overload;
 +
  - rereads all statvars of the stafile/memorystream
 +
 
 +
  procedure readstat(const aname: msestring; const statreader: tstatreader); overload;
 +
  - rereads "aname" statvar of the statfile
  
 +
  procedure writestat(const stream: ttextstream = nil); overload;
 +
  - rewrites all statvars to the stafile/memorystream
 +
  (if neccessary, prepares to writting - creates "filedir", stafile,...)
 +
 
 +
  procedure writestat(const aname: msestring; const statwriter: tstatwriter); overload;
 +
  - overwrites "aname" statvar of the statfile
 +
 
 +
  procedure updatestat(const aname: msestring; const statfiler: tstatfiler);
 +
  - depending on kind of "statfiler" ( writer/reader ), writes/reads
 +
    the most up-to-date stat data
 +
</pre>
  
function isdblclick(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
+
=== TTimer ===
//true if eventtype = et_butonpress, button is mb_left, pos in clientrect
+
=== TNoGuiAction ===
// and timedlay to last buttonpress is short
+
=== TPipeReadercomp ===
 +
=== TSysEnvManager ===
 +
=== TProcessMonitor ===
 +
=== TFilechangeNotifier ===
 +
=== TShortCutController ===
 +
=== TPostscriptPrinter ===
 +
=== TGdiPrinter ===
 +
=== TWmfPrinter ===
 +
=== TSkinController ===
 +
=== TGuiThreadComp ===
  
function isdblclicked(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
+
== Font ==
//true if eventtype in [et_buttonpress,et_butonrelease], button is mb_left,
+
See also : [[Reference:_MSEgui/TFont]]
// and timedlay to last same buttonevent is short
 
  
function isleftbuttondown(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
+
=== Any Font ===
//true if eventtype = et_butonpress, button is mb_left, pos in clientrect
+
<pre>
//origin = paintrect.pos
+
    charset { ANSI/ DEFAULT/ SYMBOL /SHIFTJIS /HANGEUL /GB2312 /CHINESEBIG5 /OEM
 
+
/JOHAB / HEBREW/ ARABIC/ GREEK/ TURKISH/ VIETNAMESE/ THAI/ EASTEUROPE/
//======================
+
RUSSIAN/ MAC/ BALTIC }
 
+
- changes the font to the nearest containing the selected encoding(charset)
widgetrect: the widget on-screen area including its frame & frame caption
+
- no font change made if the supplied encoding doesn't match any font
 
+
color
paintrect: the widget on-screen area except its frame & frame caption
+
- color of the glyphs contours
 
+
colorbackground
clientrect: virtual area which
+
- fill color of the glyph cells ( not including extraspace )
- for non-scrolling widgets, equals to "paintrect", with its "pos:= (0,0)"
+
colorshadow
- for scrolling widgets, may be bigger than "paintrect",  
+
- color of SE glyph "edges" ( if not "cl_none", deactivates "colorbackground" )
  also may shift ( change its "pos" ) when scrolling
+
extraspace
 
+
- v-space between glyph cells of adjacent text rows (negative values cause the cells to overlap )
//======================
+
height
 
+
- v-size of glyph cells, in pixels
 
+
name
 
+
- initially, font is choosen by { "family" = this name }
// the coord of outer top-left corner against the toplevel form = the window owner,
+
options:
// including the frame & frame caption
+
foo_fixed
function rootpos: pointty;
+
- changes the font to the nearest "mono" spaced (usually = Courier)
 +
foo_proportional
 +
- changes the font to the nearest "proportionally" spaced (usually = Helvetica)
 +
foo_helvetica
 +
- changes the font to the nearest in "sans" category (usually = Helvetica)
 +
foo_roman
 +
- changes the font to the nearest in "serif" category (usually = Times[ New Roman])
 +
foo_script
 +
- Win32 only, changes the font to the nearest in "script" category
 +
foo_decorative
 +
- Win32 only, changes the font to the nearest in "decorative" category
 +
foo_antialiased
 +
- Linux-only, enables antialiasing (if disabled by Xft globally)
 +
foo_nonantialiased
 +
- Linux-only, disables antialiasing (if enabled by Xft globally)
 +
usually making glyph extents (not cells !) a bit wider
 +
style:
 +
fs_bold
 +
- gives the font a "bold" look
 +
fs_italic
 +
- gives the font an "italic" look
 +
fs_underline
 +
- gives the font an "underlined" look
 +
fs_strikeout
 +
- gives the font a "striked out" look
 +
fs_selected
 +
- "TRUE" here combined with {tf_noselect:=FALSE}, causes the text described by this font
 +
to be initially selected ( with the clipboard operations available ),
 +
currently applicable only to richstrings
  
// the coord of the outer top-left corner against the screen ( the WM decorations aren't counted in )
+
width
// includes the frame & frame caption
+
- 10*{ glyph cell width, average in pixels }, 0 = {font default}
property screenpos: pointty;
+
 
 +
xscale
 +
- width ratio of each glyph {cell & contour}, the effect is similar to "width"
  
//  the coord of the outer top-left corner against the parent widget,
+
*** "foo_*" font selection overrides one made with "name"
// including the frame & frame caption
 
property widgetrect: rectty;
 
property pos: pointty; // =widgetrect.pos
 
property size: sizety; // =widgetrect.size
 
property left: integer; // =bounds_x
 
property right: integer; //widgetrect.x + widgetrect.cx, sets cx;
 
property top: integer;  // =bounds_y
 
property bottom: integer; //widgetrect.y + widgetrect.cy, sets cy;
 
property width: integer; // =bounds_cx
 
property height: integer; // =bounds_cy
 
function widgetsizerect: rectty;          //pos = nullpoint
 
  
    // the coord of the paint area ( paintrect ) against own outer top-left corner ( against "widgetrect=pos" )
+
*** if change with "foo_*" is unsuccessful then the nearest "sans" font is usually chosen
    //  except the frame & frame caption
 
function paintrect: rectty;
 
function paintpos: pointty;
 
function paintsize: sizety;
 
function innerpaintrect: rectty; // mainly equals to paintrect
 
function clientwidgetrect: rectty; // mainly equals to paintrect
 
function clientwidgetpos: pointty;
 
function clippedpaintrect: rectty; // mainly equals to  but clipped by all parentpaintrects
 
function innerwidgetrect: rectty;    // mainly equals to paintrect
 
function innerclientwidgetpos: pointty;
 
  
    // the coord of the paint area ( paintrect ) against own outer top-left corner ( against "widgetrect=pos" )
+
*** The categories :
    //  except the frame caption
 
function framerect: rectty; // =paintrect except the frame caption area
 
function framepos: pointty;
 
function framesize: sizety;
 
  
    // the coord of the client area ( clientrect )  against the paint area ( paintrect )
+
sans => have no serifs and have strokes of even thickness
    //  usually these areas match
+
serif => have serifs at glyph contours and made up of strokes of varying thickness
function clientrect: rectty;
+
script => resemble handwriting
property clientsize: sizety;
+
decorative => flashy styles to be used sparingly in headlines or posters
property clientwidth: integer;
 
property clientheight: integer;
 
property clientpos: pointty;
 
  
    // the coord of the paint area of the parent against the paint area of this widget
+
</pre>
function paintrectparent: rectty; //nullrect if parent = nil,
 
  
    // the coord of the client area of the parent against the paint area of this widget
+
== GUI ==
function clientrectparent: rectty; //nullrect if parent = nil,
+
=== TWindow ===
 +
<pre>
 +
twindow = class(teventobject,icanvas)
 +
  public
  
// the coord of the inner area against the client area ( clientrect )
+
// releases mouse, unlinks from the canvas, processes all pending events of the window
function innerclientrect: rectty;  // mainly equals to clientrect
+
// if called from within main thread then destroys the window directly
function innerclientsize: sizety;
+
// otherwise posts a window destroy event for oneself and waits for it to be processed
function innerclientpos: pointty;
+
procedure destroywindow;
  
function framewidth: sizety;              //widgetrect.size - paintrect.size
+
// registers the instance of onself in the "owner" widget, allocates the canvas,
function clientframewidth: sizety;        //widgetrect.size - clientrect.size
+
// adds a reference to oneself,
function innerclientframewidth: sizety;  //widgetrect.size - innerclientrect.size
+
// then prepares the "owner" hierarchy to be invalidated ( "owner.rootchanged" )
function innerframewidth: sizety;         //clientrect.size - innerclientrect.size 
+
// since now, the window is allocated and belongs to the "aowner" widget
 +
constructor create(aowner: twidget);
  
    // the coord of the paint area against the widgetrect(pos) of the parent
+
destructor destroy; override;
function paintparentpos: pointty;   //origin = parentwidget.pos
 
  
    // the coord of the client area against the widgetrect(pos) of the parent
+
// adds "method" to the internal list of scroll dependants
function clientparentpos: pointty;   //origin = parentwidget.pos
+
procedure registeronscroll(const method: notifyeventty);
  
    // the coord of the widgetrect(pos) against the client area of parent
+
// removes "method" from the internal list of scroll dependants
property parentclientpos: pointty;
+
procedure unregisteronscroll(const method: notifyeventty);
  
 +
// releases mouse if captured, resets the cursor, then enters an event loop for the window,
 +
// TRUE on return if the window is destroyed
 +
function beginmodal: boolean;
 +
 +
  * checks if the "sender" window is already modal to avoid circularity,
 +
    if not then starts an event loop  for the "sender" where the "sender" is a receiver of GUI events,
 +
      once the loop is terminated reactivates the previously active window if it was,
 +
    TRUE if modalwindow destroyed 
  
function clientpostowidgetpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
+
  function tinternalapplication.beginmodal(const sender: twindow): boolean;
function widgetpostoclientpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
 
function widgetpostopaintpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
 
function paintpostowidgetpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
 
procedure scale(const ascale: real); virtual;
 
  
 +
// removes the internal stuff which indicates the modal state
 +
procedure endmodal;
  
property minsize: sizety read fminsize write setminsize;
+
// if the window is visible,
property maxsize: sizety read fmaxsize write setmaxsize;
+
// deactivates the previously active window, shows the window (see below),
function maxclientsize: sizety; virtual;
+
// if no active window in the app or the window or its Z-predecessor is modal and
 +
// the app has no focused widget then prepares the bound widget to be focused,
 +
// then addresses the WM to put the window to foreground
 +
procedure activate;
  
 +
  // if the bound widget has visible=true then:
 +
  //  - if NOT windowevent then :
 +
  //    = address the WM to set size of the window acc to window opts
 +
  //      wp_maximized, wp_fullscreen or normal size otherwise
 +
  // = if the window is normally sized, moves it to its default position is specified ( screen centered etc )
 +
  // - unhides/unminimizes the window if needed
 +
  // - shows other windows of the applications acc to state of the window group
 +
  // ( in normal size or minimized )
  
property anchors: anchorsty read fanchors write setanchors default defaultanchors;
+
  private
property defaultfocuschild: twidget read getdefaultfocuschild write setdefaultfocuschild;
+
procedure twindow.show(windowevent: boolean);
  
 +
// TRUE if this window currently grabs user input
 +
( a widget drawn within the window(=form) is in focus,.. )
 +
function active: boolean;
  
procedure changeclientsize(const delta: sizety); //asynchronous
+
// if the window was active then deactivates the window  & remembers it as the previous active ( to restore leater if requested ),
 +
// returns TRUE if that storage occurred
 +
function deactivateintermediate: boolean;
  
function getcanvas(aorigin: originty = org_client): tcanvas;
+
// makes the window active & clears the above app reference to it ( "active before deactivating" )
 +
procedure reactivate; //clears app.finactivewindow
  
function showing: boolean;
+
// scans the app event queue for "ek_expose" event[s] addressed to the window,
              //true if self and all ancestors visible and window allocated
+
// if found then redraws that part of the window which the event describes
 +
// ( processed events are then deleted )
 +
procedure update;
  
function isenabled: boolean;
+
// TRUE if the window :
              //true if self and all ancestors enabled
+
// 1) doesn't have an inner widget grabbing input focus
 
+
// or
function active: boolean;
+
// 2) has such widget, and this widget ( and all its descendants )
function entered: boolean;
+
//    pass "CanClose" check
 +
//
 +
// *** see also "twidget.CanClose" ***
 +
//
 +
function candefocus: boolean;
  
function activeentered: boolean;  
+
// tries to defocus the currently focused widget if it belongs to the window,
//true if entered and window is regularactivewindow or inactivated
+
// if succeeds then executes code of virtual "DoDefocus" of the widget descessor
 +
// ( this code defines behaviour & look of the widget on defocusing );
 +
//
 +
// no defocusing is done if the focused widget ( or its descendants )
 +
// doesn't pass "CanClose" check
 +
//
 +
procedure nofocus;
 +
 
 +
  // setfocusedwidget(widget)
 +
 
 +
  property focuscount: cardinal read ffocuscount;
 +
  function close: boolean; //true if ok
 +
  procedure beginmoving; //lock window rect modification
 +
  procedure endmoving;
 +
  procedure bringtofront;
 +
  procedure sendtoback;
 +
  procedure stackunder(const predecessor: twindow);
 +
      //stacking is performed in mainloop idle, nil means top
 +
  procedure stackover(const predecessor: twindow);
 +
      //stacking is performed in mainloop idle, nil means bottom
 +
  function stackedunder: twindow; //nil if top
 +
  function stackedover: twindow;  //nil if bottom
 +
  function hastransientfor: boolean;
  
function focused: boolean;
+
  procedure capturemouse;
function clicked: boolean;
+
  procedure releasemouse;
 +
  procedure postkeyevent(const akey: keyty;
 +
        const ashiftstate: shiftstatesty = []; const release: boolean = false;
 +
                  const achars: msestring = '');
 +
 
 +
  function winid: winidty;
 +
  function haswinid: boolean;
 +
  function state: windowstatesty;
 +
  function visible: boolean;
 +
  function activating: boolean; //in internalactivate proc
 +
  function normalwindowrect: rectty;
 +
  property updateregion: regionty read fupdateregion;
 +
  function updaterect: rectty;
 +
 
 +
  procedure registermovenotification(sender: iobjectlink);
 +
  procedure unregistermovenotification(sender: iobjectlink);
  
function indexofwidget(const awidget: twidget): integer;
+
  property options: windowoptionsty read foptions;
  
procedure changedirection(const avalue: graphicdirectionty;
+
// widget
                                            var dest: graphicdirectionty); virtual;
+
property owner: twidget read fowner;
  
// (re)arranges "awidgets" horizontally within the parent's client area
+
  property focusedwidget: twidget read ffocusedwidget;
// so that awidget[i] were placed next each other
+
  property transientfor: twindow read ftransientfor;
// at h-space dist[i], starting from "startx" with the right margin "endmargin";
+
  property modalresult: modalresultty read fmodalresult write setmodalresult;
//
+
  property buttonendmodal: boolean read getbuttonendmodal write setbuttonendmodal;
// if the number of "dist" is fewer than the number of "awidgets" then the remaining h-spaces are taken
+
   property globalshortcuts: boolean read getglobalshortcuts write setglobalshortcuts;
// as the last "dist[i]" or "0" if none;
+
  property localshortcuts: boolean read getlocalshortcuts write setlocalshortcuts;
// if the number of "dist" is more than the number of "awidgets" then the extra dist[i] are discarded
+
  property windowpos: windowposty read getwindowpos write setwindowpos;
//
+
  property caption: msestring read fcaption write setcaption;
// non-zero "endmargin" causes one of awdidget[i] to h-resize to provide the margin :
 
//  - if one or more of awidgets[i] have [an_left,an_right] set then the first of such is resized
 
//   otherwise the last awidgets[i] is h-resized
 
//
 
procedure placexorder(
 
const startx: integer;  
 
const dist: array of integer;
 
                const awidgets: array of twidget;
 
                const endmargin: integer = minint);
 
  
// (re)arranges "awidgets" vertically within the parent's client area
 
// so that awidget[i] were placed upper/lower each other
 
// at v-space dist[i], starting from "starty" with the bottom margin "endmargin";
 
//
 
// if the number of "dist" is fewer than the number of "awidgets" then the remaining v-spaces are taken
 
// as the last "dist[i]" or "0" if none;
 
// if the number of "dist" is more than the number of "awidgets" then the extra dist[i] are discarded
 
//
 
// non-zero "endmargin" causes one of awdidget[i] to v-resize to provide the margin :
 
//  - if one or more of awidgets[i] have [an_top,an_bottom] set then the first of such is resized
 
//    otherwise the last awidgets[i] is v-resized
 
//
 
procedure placeyorder(
 
const starty: integer;
 
const dist: array of integer;
 
                const awidgets: array of twidget;
 
                const endmargin: integer = minint);
 
              //origin = clientpos, endmargin by size adjust of widgets
 
              //with [an_top,an_bottom], minint -> no change
 
  
// if {mode <> wam_none} then (re)arranges "awidgets" horizontally within the parent's client area so that
+
  windowoptionty = (wo_popup,wo_message,wo_buttonendmodal,wo_groupleader,
// awidgets[0] stays on its place but awidgets[1..N] :
+
                  wo_windowcentermessage); //showmessage centered in window
// - if {mode = wam_end} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_left" set ) so that they right borders match the right border of awidgets[0]
 
// - if {mode = wam_start} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_right" set ) so that they left borders match the left border of awidgets[0]
 
// - if {mode = wam_center} then awidgets[i>=1] move so that they Y-axes match the Y-axe of awidgets[0]
 
//
 
// mainly applicable for v-stacked widgets since h-stacked may overlap after such alignment
 
//
 
        // returns the reference point ( the coord of awidgets[0] )
 
function alignx(const mode: widgetalignmodety;
 
                        const awidgets: array of twidget): integer;
 
  
  
// if {mode <> wam_none} then (re)arranges "awidgets" vertically within the parent's client area so that
+
optionswindow:
// awidgets[0] stays on its place but awidgets[1..N] :  
+
wo_popup
// - if {mode = wam_end} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_top" set ) so that they bottom borders match the bottom border of awidgets[0]
+
- in run-time, hides all OS windows-manager ( WM ) decorations (title bar, buttons "Close/Resize,Min/Max" etc),
// - if {mode = wam_start} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_bottom" set ) so that they top borders match the top border of awidgets[0]
+
letting only its client area to appear
// - if {mode = wam_center} then awidgets[i>=1] move so that they X-axes match the X-axe of awidgets[0]
+
so :
//
+
= the window should have own facilities to replace the deactivated WM functionality if needed
// mainly applicable for h-stacked widgets since v-stacked may overlap after such alignment
+
= can't be resized/maximize/minimized/moved
//
+
wo_message
        // returns the reference point ( the coord of awidgets[0] )
+
- similar to "wo_popup" but allows WM to close ( with "Close" button ) & move the window
function aligny(const mode: widgetalignmodety;
 
                        const awidgets: array of twidget): integer;
 
 
 
function actualcursor: cursorshapety; virtual;
 
  
 +
wo_groupleader
 +
- keeps on the WM taskbar a shortcut to the window
 +
( if the parent window is a groupleader too then displays a step upper in its group )
  
 
Event handlers:
 
Event handlers:
  
- onactivate
+
- onmove
 +
= fires once the (window/widget) is created/moved ( with check if really moved by a distance)
  
fires :
+
</pre>
  
= on receiving input focus, just before "OnFocus"
+
=== TFormScrollbox ===
+
<pre>
= forms specific :
+
- presents client area of form & parent of its widgets,  
* on 1-st display of the form after "OnLoaded" ( from "Loaded" procedure)
+
initially stretched to fit the form & bound with anchoring
* on switch back from another apllication/WM ( "oe_activate" event )
+
but may be adjusted with "bounds" & "anchors"
* after closure of a descendant form
+
 
* on minimizing/maximizing the form
+
    Properties:
 +
               
 +
anchors
 +
bounds
 +
 +
color
 +
- color of the whole container area ( except its frame ) & form widgets
 +
if their color is "cl_parent"
  
- onchildscaled
+
name = container
  
fires :
+
cursor, enabled, face, frame, helpcontext, hint, optionswidget, popupmenu,
 +
taborder, tag, visible, onactivate, onafterpaint, onbeforepaint,
 +
onchildmouseevent, onclientmouseevent, ondeativate, ondefocus, onenter,
 +
onexit, onfocus, onfontheightdelta, onmouseevent, onpaint, onpopup
 +
onresize, onshowhint
 +
- the same meaning as for the served form
  
= on child(s) resizing due to font height change
 
  
= form widget: once "form.container" {scrolling widget} is loaded
+
oncalcminscrollsize
 +
onscroll
 +
onchildscaled
 +
</pre>
  
- ondeactivate
+
=== TFaceList ===
fires
+
=== TFrameComp ===
= form widget: when the form looses input focus
 
= non-form widget: when the widget looses input focus
 
  
- ondefocus
+
See also here: [[Reference:_MSEgui/TFrame]].
  
fires
+
= on disabling the widget
+
<pre>
 +
Terminology :
  
*mse = form widget: if another form is focused
+
{client area = area of the widget which interacts with a user}
= non-form widget: if another widget is focused
 
  
- onenter
+
{bevelling = additional facets rising/sinking frame & client area,
= fires on any way of taking parent-wide focus as soon as
+
constists of two parts -
the parent stores the new child's order, before "OnActivate" & "OnFocus"
+
- external: between frame and widget
 +
- internal: between frame and client area
 +
}
  
- onexit
+
{frame= flat space between external & internal facets,
= fires last on parent-wide lossing focus, after "OnDefocus" & "OnDeactivate"
+
floats at the inner level of the external facet
= for top-level ( not in a container ) forms, doesn't fire
+
}
  
- onfocus
+
*** Both frame & bevelling affect the client area ***
fires
 
= once the existing widget takes the focus
 
= on showing the widget's form if the widget has the lowest "TabOrder"
 
  
- onfontheightdelta
+
--------------------------
fires
+
template:
= if [ow_fontglyphheight OR ow_fontlineheight ] AND {the
 
new font height differs from the previos one}
 
= before the parent redraws this widget
 
  
- onpopup
+
colorclient = color of the client area
fires :
 
= on calling a popup-menu ( with "RightClick" ), once the menu items of the current level are loaded
 
( before building the submenus )
 
  
- onresize
+
colorframe = color of the frame
 +
colorframeactive = used instead of colorframe if the widget is
 +
active; "cl_default" means same as colorframe.
  
= fires on creating/(changing size)/(min-max restoring) of widget,  
+
works if (leveli/levelo <> 0 that's the facets exist :
before actual redrawing
+
 
 +
colorshadow = color of facets screened from the NW light source
 +
colordkshadow = color of shadows dropped by the NW light source
 +
                colordkwidth = width of the shadows in pixel, -1=default
  
= rechecks if there's real work to do
+
colorlight = color of facets exposed to the NW light source
 +
colorhighlight = color of brighter edges of the facets
 +
                colorhlwidth = width of the brighter edges in pixel, -1=default
  
- onshowhint
+
        extraspace = if applied to menu items, adds more space between these items
= fires when a installed hint is activated or on "aplication.showint" called
 
= since called last, allows to adjust the default behavior
 
  
- onbeforeupdateskin
+
framei_:
= fires in "updateskin" ( the widget is loaded etc ) before applying the skin
+
(for extendable widgets like menus, these settings widen the widget,
 +
for non-extendable like buttons - they squeeze the text area )
  
- onafterupdateskin
+
bottom= lower margin of text to the client area
= fires in "updateskin" ( the widget is loaded etc ) once the skin is applied
+
left = left margin of text to the client area
 +
right = margin of text to the client area
 +
top = upper margin of text to the client area
  
<pre/>
+
framewidth= width of the frame
 +
leveli = {width=height} of the internal facet, positive -> raised, negative -> sunken
 +
levelo = {width=height} of the external facet, positive -> raised, negative -> sunken
  
== NoGui ==
+
<any frame>
=== TAction ===
 
<pre>
 
Shortcut processing order :
 
  
- the smallest piece of processing is "doshortcut" procedure which
+
*** extends & customizes "tframecomp" ***
is called until processed:
 
= starting from the sender up to the toplevel widget
 
= then by all child widgets with non-set "ow_noparentshortcut"
 
= then, if "ow_nochildshortcut" isn't set, by the parent widget
 
= then by the widget oneself
 
 
- "doshortcut" is checked in the following order:
 
= starting from form's main menu
 
= then from the owning window ( the widget oneself )
 
= then from the application
 
  
 +
template
 +
- "tframecomp" supplying the initial settings
  
*** A shortcut is bound to a widget by :
+
colorclient,colordkshadow,colordkwidth,colorframe,colorframeactive,
- placing an action component on the widget ***
+
colorhighlight,colorhlwidth,colorlight,colorshadow,framewidth,  
- direct assigning the shortcut to the widget (menus,..)
+
leveli, levelo, framei_*,
---------------------------
 
  
caption, color, colorglyph, helpcontext, hint, imagecheckedoffset,
+
<see "tframecomp">
imagelist <see "timagelist">, imagenr, imagenrdisabled
 
  
- sets look of "clients" (buttons, menu/toolbar items,..), unless
+
font
these clients have "state.as_local*" set :
+
<see "tfont">
  
*** For meaning of these options, see help on the "client" widgets ***
+
caption
 +
- some descriptive text( function name, user prompt,...) placed
 +
in a N/W/S/E-combination to the widget's client area
  
group
+
***
- default value for one-named property of the bound widgets
+
non-empty caption if (captionpos <> cp_center) & (captiondistouter=false & captiondist>0) enlarges the framed widget
( menu items,... )
+
by the corresponding size of caption
  
options :
+
***
ao_updateonidle
 
- runs this action in cycle, waiting for no gui events everytime
 
  
ao_globalshortcut
+
captiondist - margin between the caption & the client area
- allows the action to trigger on a non-main form
 
  (the shortcut is triggered whatever form of the applicatin it was pressed on,
 
  otherwise only when the form where the aption is placed on is focused )
 
  
ao_nocandefocus
+
captiondistouter :
- causes the action not to call "CanDefocus" for focused edit widget of active form
 
  before executing own code
 
  ( it helps to avoid the effect of cancelling changes in these widgets
 
  on activating the bound shortcut )
 
  
shortcut
+
- if "false"(by default), the distance is measured between
- keyboard combination triggering the action
+
the inner (facing the client area) extent of the caption
 +
and the client area outward the area,
 +
the caption is placed outside of the client area
  
shortcut
+
- if "true", the caption is mirrored against the edge of client area as
- alternative "shortcut" and handled identically
+
to the position when "false"
  
state :
+
*** nagative values of "captiondist" visually inverse "out of" and within ***
  
as_disabled
+
      captionnoclip - do not clip frame and client area for caption background
- prevents the action from triggering, also puts the bound widgets to "disabled" look
+
( the client area preserves own background under the caption text)
  
as_invisible
+
captionnooffset - shift orthogonal to "captiondist"
- in run-time, hides the bound widget, still reacting on the shortcut or direct call
 
  
as_checked
+
captionpos - "corner" where to place the caption
- selects the bound menu item if it has "mao_checkbox" option set
+
 
 +
localprops :
  
as_default
+
frl_levelo - "levelo" overrides "template.levelo"
as_local*
+
frl_leveli - "leveli" overrides "template.leveli"
 +
frl_framewidth - "framewidth" overrides "template.framewidth"
 +
frl_colorclient - "colorclient" overrides "template.colorclient"
 +
frl_colorframe - "colorframe" overrides "template.colorframe"
 +
frl_colorframeactive - "colorframeactive" overrides "template.colorframeactive"
 +
frl_colordkshadow - "colordkshadow" overrides "template.colordkshadow"
 +
frl_colorshadow - "colorshadow" overrides "template.colorshadow"
 +
frl_colorlight - "colorlight" overrides "template.colorlight"
 +
frl_colorhighlight - "colorhighlight" overrides "template.colorhighlight"
 +
frl_colordkwidth - "colordkwidth" overrides "template.colordkwidth"
 +
frl_colorhlwidth - "colorhlwidth" overrides "template.colorhlwidth"
 +
frl_fileft - "framei_left" overrides "template.framei_left"
 +
frl_firight - "framei_right" overrides "template.framei_right"
 +
frl_fitop - "framei_top" overrides "template.framei_top"
 +
frl_fibottom - "framei_bottom" overrides "template.framei_bottom"
  
statfile
+
frl_nodisable
<see "tstatfile">
+
</pre>
  
stavarname
+
=== TFaceComp ===
  
+
See also here: https://wiki.freepascal.org/Reference:_MSEgui/TFace
tagaction
+
 
onasyncevent
+
<pre>
onchange
+
- doesn't affect the widget frame but client area of the frame
onexecute
 
onupdate
 
<pre/>
 
  
=== TActivator ===
 
=== TThreadComp ===
 
=== TStatFile ===
 
- so that to be in effect, it should also be assigned to the form where the widget using the stafile is placed on
 
- in design, if "onstatwrite" is set and "filedir" is not yet created, deactivate exception "ECreateError" in project settings ( "Debugger" tab )
 
- "filedir" may contain "~/" indicating the user's home directory
 
- options "oe_savestate" & "oe_savevalue" of "client" widgets define what to store to the file
 
- position etc changes or/and value changes
 
- in case when a main form shares its stafile with non-main forms, on creating non-main ones, just edited not saved data of the main form ( bound to vars of the statfile) are reset to values read from the statfile upon creating the form; for "sfo_memory", this effect absents unless widgets on the concurring forms share same variable[s]; to avoid this behaviour, disable "fo_autoreadstat" & "fo_autowritestat" of the non-main forms
 
- each "tstafile" owns:
 
= tstatwriter:
 
* provides methods of writing sections & statvars to a memory/file stream
 
- tstatreader:
 
* holds list of sections with statvars each
 
* provides search & check & reading interface to the statvars
 
* provides reading statvars from a memory/file stream
 
  
Positioning to a section speeds up accessing its statvars
+
template:
 +
fade:
 +
color[i]: = colors forming the fade
 +
direction: = direction where the fade grows to
 +
gd_(right/up/left/down)
  
- there also is "tstatfiler" ( exposed by some "tstatfile" events ) which:
+
pos[i]: = relational position of color[i] on the direction (0.0..1.0) extent
= may present or "tstatwriter" or "tstatreader" ( there's a check method )
+
 
= provides directionless "update" methods with internal switch to needed direction of processing
+
transparency = makes the face half-transparent and enlighten the underlying widget 
- "reading" or "writing" statvars on per-section basis
+
with a light source of the selected color
 +
( in this case, colors of the face & the widget & the light source
 +
simply summarize to higher brightness )
 +
 
 +
image:
 +
see <any image>
 +
 
 +
options:
 +
 
 +
        *** The fade colors are used not as colors but RGB alpha values ($00 -> opaque, $ff -> transparent)  
 +
if fao_alpha* are set *** :
 +
 
 +
fao_alphafadeall = applies blending to the widget & all its children
 +
fao_alphafadenochildren = preserves child widgets from blending
 +
                fao_alphafadeimage = applies blending to "face.image"  
  
=== TTimer ===
 
=== TNoGuiAction ===
 
=== TPipeReadercomp ===
 
=== TSysEnvManager ===
 
=== TProcessMonitor ===
 
=== TFilechangeNotifier ===
 
=== TShortCutController ===
 
=== TPostscriptPrinter ===
 
=== TGdiPrinter ===
 
=== TWmfPrinter ===
 
=== TSkinController ===
 
=== TGuiThreadComp ===
 
  
== Font ==
+
<any face>
=== Any Font ===
+
 
<pre>
+
*** extends & customizes "tfacecomp" ***
    charset { ANSI/ DEFAULT/ SYMBOL /SHIFTJIS /HANGEUL /GB2312 /CHINESEBIG5 /OEM
+
 
/JOHAB / HEBREW/ ARABIC/ GREEK/ TURKISH/ VIETNAMESE/ THAI/ EASTEUROPE/
+
fade, image, option
RUSSIAN/ MAC/ BALTIC }
+
- see "tfacecomp"
- changes the font to the nearest containing the selected encoding(charset)
+
- no font change made if the supplied encoding doesn't match any font
+
template
color
+
- "tfacecomp" supplying the initial settings
- color of the glyphs contours
+
 
colorbackground
+
localprops :
- fill color of the glyph cells ( not including extraspace )
+
fal_options - "options" overrides "template.options"
colorshadow
+
fal_fadirection - "fade.direction" overrides "template.fade.direction"
- color of SE glyph "edges" ( if not "cl_none", deactivates "colorbackground" )
+
fal_image - "image" overrides "template.image"
extraspace
+
fal_fapos - "fade.pos[i]" overrides "template.fade.pos[i]"
- v-space between glyph cells of adjacent text rows (negative values cause the cells to overlap )
+
fal_facolor - "fade.color[i]" overrides "template.fade.color[i]"
height
+
fal_fatransparency - "fade.transparency" overrides "template.fade.transparency"
- v-size of glyph cells, in pixels
+
</pre>
name
+
 
- initially, font is choosen by { "family" = this name }
+
=== TBitmapComp ===
options:
+
=== TScalingwidget ===
foo_fixed
+
<pre>
- changes the font to the nearest "mono" spaced (usually = Courier)
+
  optionsscale :  
foo_proportional
+
autosizing to provide room for :
- changes the font to the nearest "proportionally" spaced (usually = Helvetica)
+
= {"frame.caption" + "offset_*"}
foo_helvetica
+
= "offset_*" if "frame.caption" is unset and "osc_shrink*" is set
- changes the font to the nearest in "sans" category (usually = Helvetica)
+
foo_roman
+
= osc_expandx
- changes the font to the nearest in "serif" category (usually = Times[ New Roman])
+
- makes the widget wider to fit the caption if needed
foo_script
+
 
- Win32 only, changes the font to the nearest in "script" category
+
= osc_shrinkx
foo_decorative
+
- makes the widget narrower to have no space left & right to the "frame.caption"
- Win32 only, changes the font to the nearest in "decorative" category
 
foo_antialiased
 
- Linux-only, enables antialiasing (if disabled by Xft globally)
 
foo_nonantialiased
 
- Linux-only, disables antialiasing (if enabled by Xft globally)
 
usually making glyph extents (not cells !) a bit wider
 
style:
 
fs_bold
 
- gives the font a "bold" look
 
fs_italic
 
- gives the font an "italic" look
 
fs_underline
 
- gives the font an "underlined" look
 
fs_strikeout
 
- gives the font a "striked out" look
 
fs_selected
 
- "TRUE" here combined with {tf_noselect:=FALSE}, causes the text described by this font
 
to be initially selected ( with the clipboard operations available ),
 
currently applicable only to richstrings
 
  
width
+
= osc_expandy
- 10*{ glyph cell width, average in pixels }, 0 = {font default}
+
- makes the widget taller to fit the caption if needed
  
xscale
+
= osc_shrinky
- width ratio of each glyph {cell & contour}, the effect is similar to "width"
+
- makes the widget lower to have no space up & down to the "frame.caption"
  
*** "foo_*" font selection overrides one made with "name"  
+
= osc_invisishrinkx
 +
- fully h-collapses if "visible=false" ( run-time only )
  
*** if change with "foo_*" is usuccessful then the nearest "sans" font is usually choosen
+
= osc_invisishrinky
 +
- fully v-collapses if "visible=false" ( run-time only )
  
*** The categories :
+
</pre>
  
sans => have no serifs and have strokes of even thickness
+
=== TImageList ===
serif => have serifs at glyph contours and made up of strokes of varying thickness
+
=== TPopupMenu ===
script => resemble handwriting
+
=== TMainMenu ===
decorative => flashy styles to be used sparingly in headlines or posters
 
  
<pre/>
+
== Dialog ==
 +
=== TFileListview ===
 +
=== TFileDialog ===
 +
=== TFaceComp ===
 +
=== TFileNameEdit ===
 +
=== TDirDropdownEdit ===
 +
=== TColorEdit ===
 +
=== TMemoDialogEdit ===
 +
=== TPageSizeSelector ===
 +
=== TPageOrientationSelector ===
  
== GUI ==
+
== Application ==
=== TWindow ===
+
=== TGuiApplication ===
 
<pre>
 
<pre>
twindow = class(teventobject,icanvas)
+
tguiapplication = class(tcustomapplication)
 
   public
 
   public
  
// releases mouse, unlinks from the canvas, processes all pending events of the window
+
  // [re]starts the system timer with the new period and
// if called from within main thead then destroys the window directly
+
  // subscribes the application to be a receiver of the modified "ek_timer" event
// otherwise posts a window destroy event for oneself and waits for it to be processed
+
  // ( can check for it in the event queue )
procedure destroywindow;
+
  procedure settimer(const us: integer);
  
// registers the instance of onself in the "owner" widget, allocates the canvas,
+
  // finds a window by its winID
// adds a reference to oneself,
+
  function findwindow(id: winidty; out window: twindow): boolean;
// then prepares the "owner" hierarchy to be invalidated ( "owner.rootchanged" )
 
// since now, the window is allocated and belongs to the "aowner" widget
 
constructor create(aowner: twidget);
 
  
destructor destroy; override;
+
  // finds a window by its ID & adjusts "rect" so that it
 +
  // fits "bounds_minc*" & "bounds_maxc*" of the found window
 +
  procedure checkwindowrect(winid: winidty; var rect: rectty);
  
// adds "method" to the internal list of scroll dependants
+
  // initialises the timer and "megraphics"
procedure registeronscroll(const method: notifyeventty);
+
  procedure initialize;
  
// removes "method" from the internal list of scroll dependants
+
  // frees the allocated system resources (GDI, event subscription, the timer)
procedure unregisteronscroll(const method: notifyeventty);
+
  procedure deinitialize;
  
// releases mouse if captured, resets the cursor, then enters an event loop for the window,
+
  // creates a form instance, it will be shown in "application.run"
// TRUE on return if the window is destroyed
+
  procedure createform(instanceclass: widgetclassty; var reference);
function beginmodal: boolean;
 
 
  * checks if the "sender" window is already modal to avoid circularity,
 
    if not then starts an event loop  for the "sender" where the "sender" is a receiver of GUI events,
 
      once the loop is terminated reactivates the previously active window if it was,
 
    TRUE if modalwindow destroyed 
 
  
  function tinternalapplication.beginmodal(const sender: twindow): boolean;
+
  // invalidates all registered forms ( all their widgets will be redrawn )
 +
  procedure invalidate;  
 +
 
 +
  // calls a nested main event loop, forces processing any pending messages,
 +
  procedure processmessages; override; //handle with care!
  
// removes the internal stuff which indicates the modal state
+
  // TRUE if no pending events to process for the application
procedure endmodal;
+
  function idle: boolean; override;
 +
 
 +
  // requests to indicate waiting ( to show the "watches" cursors )
 +
  procedure beginwait; override;
  
// if the window is visible,
+
  // removes the "watches" if no unclosed requests for displaying them,
// deactivates the previously active window, shows the window (see below),
+
  // otherwise closes the currently active request
// if no active window in the app or the window or its Z-predescessor is modal and
+
  procedure endwait; override;
// the app has no focused widget then prepares the bound widget to be focused,
 
// then addresses the WM to put the window to foreground
 
procedure activate;
 
  
  // if the bound widget has visible=true then:
+
  // TRUE if there are unclosed requests for displaying "watches"
  //  - if NOT windowevent then :
+
  function waiting: boolean;
  //    = address the WM to set size of the window acc to window opts
 
  //      wp_maximized, wp_fullscreen or normal size otherwise
 
  // = if the window is normally sized, moves it to its default position is specified ( screen centered etc )
 
  // - unhides/unminimizes the window if needed
 
  // - shows other windows of the applications acc to state of the window group
 
  // ( in normal size or minimized )
 
  
  private
+
  // TRUE if ESC has just been pressed
procedure twindow.show(windowevent: boolean);
+
  //  - if all requests for displaying "watches" are closed then refreshes
 +
  //    the internal list of events ( the GUI-queue -> the app event list)
 +
  function waitescaped: boolean; //true if escape pressed while waiting
  
// TRUE if this window currently grabs user input
+
  // sets state of the current wait dialogue ( but doesn't close one ) to undefined
( a widget drawn within the window(=form) is in focus,.. )
+
  procedure resetwaitdialog;  
function active: boolean;
 
  
// if the window was active then deactivates the window  & remembers it as the previous active ( to restore leater if requested ),
+
  // runs "aexecuteaction" in the main thread in OnIdle mode,
// returns TRUE if that storage occured
+
  // then shows a cancellable message,
function deactivateintermediate: boolean;  
+
  // if the one is cancelled then runs "acancelaction" then  
 
+
  // either fully clears (if exceptions occur )  
// makes the window active & clears the above app reference to it ( "active before deactivating" )
+
  // or terminates the execution otherwise,
procedure reactivate; //clears app.finactivewindow
+
  // true if not cancelled;
 +
  // "application.processmessages" must be called regularly if "aexecuteaction" is used here,
 +
  // alternatively "aidleaction" can be used, call sleep ( some time ) in order to minimize
 +
  // processor load.
 +
  // If athread <> nil the function starts and terminates the thread   
 +
  function waitdialog(const athread: tthreadcomp = nil; const atext: msestring = '';
 +
                  const caption: msestring = '';
 +
                  const acancelaction: notifyeventty = nil;
 +
                  const aexecuteaction: notifyeventty = nil): boolean; override;
 +
 
 +
  // closes the currently modal waitdialogue with "cancelled" state
 +
  procedure cancelwait;
  
// scans the app event queue for "ek_expose" event[s] addressed to the window,
+
  // closes the currently modal waitdialogue with "ok" state
// if found then redraws that part of the window which the event describes
+
  procedure terminatewait;
// ( processed events are then deleted )
 
procedure update;
 
  
// TRUE if the window :
+
  function waitstarted: boolean;  // the last waitdialogue is currently showing for some requests
// 1) doesn't have an inner widget grabbing input focus
+
  function waitcanceled: boolean;  // the last waitdialogue has been cancelled for some request (but can be shown fot others ?)
// or
+
   function waitterminated: boolean; // the last waitdialogue has been terminated for some request (but can be shown fot others ?)
// 2) has such widget, and this widget ( and all its descendants )  
 
//   pass "CanClose" check
 
//
 
// *** see also "twidget.CanClose" ***
 
//
 
function candefocus: boolean;
 
  
// tries to defocus the currently focused widget if it belongs to the window,
+
  // if called from the main app thread then shows as a modal message describing the exception
// if succeeds then executes code of virtual "DoDefocus" of the widget descessor
+
  // otherwise posts an async event for which the message will be called
// ( this code defines behaviour & look of the widget on defocusing );
+
  procedure showexception(e: exception; const leadingtext: string = ''); override;
//
+
 
// no defocusing is done if the focused widget ( or its descendants )
+
   // posts an async event for which the message describing the exception will be called
// doesn't pass "CanClose" check
+
   procedure showasyncexception(e: exception; const leadingtext: string = '');
//
 
procedure nofocus;
 
 
 
  // setfocusedwidget(widget)
 
 
 
  property focuscount: cardinal read ffocuscount;
 
  function close: boolean; //true if ok
 
   procedure beginmoving; //lock window rect modification
 
   procedure endmoving;
 
  procedure bringtofront;
 
  procedure sendtoback;
 
  procedure stackunder(const predecessor: twindow);
 
      //stacking is performed in mainloop idle, nil means top
 
  procedure stackover(const predecessor: twindow);
 
      //stacking is performed in mainloop idle, nil means bottom
 
  function stackedunder: twindow; //nil if top
 
  function stackedover: twindow;  //nil if bottom
 
  function hastransientfor: boolean;
 
  
   procedure capturemouse;
+
   // "application.errormessage" shows standard error message ( with "ERROR" title )
   procedure releasemouse;
+
   procedure errormessage(const amessage: msestring); override;
  procedure postkeyevent(const akey: keyty;  
+
 
        const ashiftstate: shiftstatesty = []; const release: boolean = false;
+
  // [re]calculates timings & position of hint for "ahintedwidget"
                  const achars: msestring = '');
+
  // if "ow_timedhint" in "ahintedwidget.foptionswidget" then iys showtime will be
 +
  // "defaulthintshowtime" ( an app wide setting, 3sec by default) 
 +
  procedure inithintinfo(var info: hintinfoty; const ahintedwidget: twidget);
  
  function winid: winidty;
 
  function haswinid: boolean;
 
  function state: windowstatesty;
 
  function visible: boolean;
 
  function activating: boolean; //in internalactivate proc
 
  function normalwindowrect: rectty;
 
  property updateregion: regionty read fupdateregion;
 
  function updaterect: rectty;
 
  
   procedure registermovenotification(sender: iobjectlink);
+
  // shows the supplied hint text within "aposrect" with alignment "aplacement" during "ashowtime",
  procedure unregistermovenotification(sender: iobjectlink);
+
  // the avail ( but not used currenly ) flags are : hfl_show,hfl_custom,hfl_noautohidemove,hfl_noautohidemove 
 +
   procedure showhint(const sender: twidget; const hint: msestring;
 +
              const aposrect: rectty; const aplacement: captionposty = cp_bottomleft;
 +
              const ashowtime: integer = defaulthintshowtime; //0 -> inifinite,
 +
                // -1 defaultshowtime if ow_timedhint in sender.optionswidget
 +
              const aflags: hintflagsty = defaulthintflags
 +
                      ); overload;
  
   property options: windowoptionsty read foptions;
+
   // shows the supplied hint text at left-top position"apos" during "ashowtime",
 +
  // the avail ( but not used currenly ) flags are : hfl_show,hfl_custom,hfl_noautohidemove,hfl_noautohidemove 
 +
  procedure showhint(const sender: twidget; const hint: msestring;
 +
              const apos: pointty;
 +
              const ashowtime: integer = defaulthintshowtime; //0 -> inifinite,
 +
                // -1 defaultshowtime if ow_timedhint in sender.optionswidget
 +
              const aflags: hintflagsty = defaulthintflags
 +
                      ); overload;
  
// widget  
+
  // shows the hint fully defined in "info" for the widget "sender"
property owner: twidget read fowner;
+
  procedure showhint(const sender: twidget; const info: hintinfoty); overload;
  
   property focusedwidget: twidget read ffocusedwidget;
+
   // removes the current hint widget & frees its resources & stops its stop timer
   property transientfor: twindow read ftransientfor;
+
   procedure hidehint;
  property modalresult: modalresultty read fmodalresult write setmodalresult;
 
  property buttonendmodal: boolean read getbuttonendmodal write setbuttonendmodal;
 
  property globalshortcuts: boolean read getglobalshortcuts write setglobalshortcuts;
 
  property localshortcuts: boolean read getlocalshortcuts write setlocalshortcuts;
 
  property windowpos: windowposty read getwindowpos write setwindowpos;
 
  property caption: msestring read fcaption write setcaption;
 
  
 +
  // restarts the current hint and its stop timer
 +
  procedure restarthint(const sender: twidget);
  
windowoptionty = (wo_popup,wo_message,wo_buttonendmodal,wo_groupleader,
+
  function hintedwidget: twidget; //last hinted widget
                  wo_windowcentermessage); //showmessage centered in window
+
  function activehintedwidget: twidget; //nil if no hint active
  
 +
  // returns helpcontext of active widget, '' if none; 
 +
  function activehelpcontext: msestring;
  
optionswindow:
+
  // returns helpcontext of the widget under mouse, '' if none;
wo_popup
+
  function mousehelpcontext: msestring;
- in run-time, hides all OS windows-manager ( WM ) decorations (title bar, buttons "Close/Resize,Min/Max" etc),
 
letting only its client area to appear
 
so :
 
= the window should have own facilities to replace the deactivated WM functionality if needed
 
= can't be resized/maximize/minimized/moved
 
wo_message
 
- similar to "wo_popup" but allows WM to close ( with "Close" button ) & move the window
 
  
wo_groupleader
+
  // TRUE if one of the app's window/console is in input focus
- keeps on the WM taskbar a shortcut to the window
+
  function active: boolean;
( if the parent window is a groupleader too then dislpays a step upper in its group )
 
  
Event handlers:
+
  // returns the desktop resolution ( or the virtual one if used )
 +
  function screensize: sizety;
  
- onmove
+
  // returns the (virtual) desktop resolution except the tray area,
= fires once the (window/widget) is created/moved ( with check if really moved by a distance)
+
  // nil -> current active window
 +
  function workarea(const awindow: twindow = nil): rectty;
  
<pre/>
+
  // returns which application window ( a form not an eventwidget, an openglwidget or a windowwidget !)
=== TFaceList ===
+
  // is active ( provides the input focus ),
=== TFrameComp ===
+
  // it's same for all widgets of the form served by this window
+
  function activewindow: twindow;
Terminilogy :
 
  
{client area = area of the widget which interacts with a user}
+
/ * A transient window is a descendant of ( "transientfor" ) another window in the stacking order hierarchy */
  
{bevelling = additional facets rising/sinking frame & client area,
+
  // returns a first non-transient ( on top of the app stacking order ) window upward
constists of two parts -
+
  // from the currently active window of the application.
- external: between frame and widget
+
  // or that active window if no such
- internal: between frame and client area
+
  function regularactivewindow: twindow;
}
 
  
{frame= flat space between external & internal facets,
+
  // same as "activewindow" but the window must not be released (?)
floats at the inner level of the external facet
+
  function unreleasedactivewindow: twindow;
}
 
  
*** Both frame & bevelling affect the client area ***
+
  // returns the focused widget of the currently active window if one exists
 +
  function activewidget: twidget;
  
--------------------------
+
  // returns the widget presenteing the currently active window
template:
+
  function activerootwidget: twidget;
 
+
 
colorclient = color of the client area
+
  // returns the window ( not hidden or disabled !) under the screen point "pos"
 +
  function windowatpos(const pos: pointty): twindow;
  
colorframe = color of the frame
+
  // puts to "awidget" the container of widget pointed by "namepath"
colorframeactive = used instead of colorframe if the widget is
+
  // ( finalizing "." is discarded if found ) ,
active; "cl_default" means same as colorframe.
+
  // FALSE if not found, and NIL and TRUE if "namepath" = ''
 +
  function findwidget(const namepath: string; out awidget: twidget): boolean;
  
works if (leveli/levelo <> 0 that's the facets exist :
+
  // rebuilds the application's window list accorrding to the current on-screen Z-order of its windows;
 +
  // window list is ordered by "z" - bottom first & top last;
 +
  // invisibles first
 +
  procedure sortzorder;
  
colorshadow = color of facets screened from the NW light source
+
  // returns a copy of the internal window list of application
colordkshadow = color of shadows dropped by the NW light source
+
  function windowar: windowarty;
                colordkwidth = width of the shadows in pixel, -1=default
 
  
colorlight = color of facets exposed to the NW light source
+
  // returns the list of application window winIDs
colorhighlight = color of brighter edges of the facets
+
  function winidar: winidarty;
                colorhlwidth = width of the brighter edges in pixel, -1=default
 
  
        extraspace = if applied to menu items, adds more space between these items
+
  // returns the count of the application windows   
 +
  function windowcount: integer;
  
framei_:
+
  // returns the window by its number ( "index" >= 0) in the application window list
(for extendable widgets like menus, these settings widen the widget,
+
  property windows[const index: integer]: twindow read getwindows;
for non-extendable like buttons - they squeeze the text area )
 
  
bottom= lower margin of text to the client area
+
  // returns the lowest visible window in stackorder,
left = left margin of text to the client area
+
  // calls "sortzorder" within
right = margin of text to the client area
+
  function bottomwindow: twindow;
top = upper margin of text to the client area
 
  
framewidth= width of the frame
+
  // returns the highest visible window in stackorder,
leveli = {width=height} of the internal facet, positive -> raised, negative -> sunken
+
  // calls "sortzorder" within
levelo = {width=height} of the external facet, positive -> raised, negative -> sunken
+
  function topwindow: twindow;
  
<any frame>
 
  
*** extends & customizes "tframecomp" ***
+
  // TRUE if all owned windows pass "CanClose" check or
 +
  // don't have focused widgets
 +
  function candefocus: boolean;
  
template
+
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive keyboard events
- "tframecomp" supplying the initial settings
+
  procedure registeronkeypress(const method: keyeventty);
  
colorclient,colordkshadow,colordkwidth,colorframe,colorframeactive,
+
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving keyboard events
colorhighlight,colorhlwidth,colorlight,colorshadow,framewidth,
+
  procedure unregisteronkeypress(const method: keyeventty);
leveli, levelo, framei_*,
 
  
<see "tframecomp">
+
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive shortcut events
 +
  procedure registeronshortcut(const method: keyeventty);
  
font
+
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving shortcut events
<see "tfont">
+
  procedure unregisteronshortcut(const method: keyeventty);
  
caption
+
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnWindowActiveChanged" event ( form-wide )
- some descriptive text( function name, user prompt,...) placed
+
  procedure registeronactivechanged(const method: activechangeeventty);
in a N/W/S/E-combination to the widget's client area
 
  
***
+
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnWindowActiveChanged" event ( form-wide )
non-empty caption if (captionpos <> cp_center) & (captiondistouter=false & captiondist>0) enlarges the framed widget
+
  procedure unregisteronactivechanged(const method: activechangeeventty);
by the corresponding size of caption
 
  
***
+
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
 +
  procedure registeronwindowdestroyed(const method: windoweventty);
  
captiondist - margin between the caption & the client area
+
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
 +
  procedure unregisteronwindowdestroyed(const method: windoweventty);
  
captiondistouter :
+
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnWindowDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
 +
  procedure registeronwiniddestroyed(const method: winideventty);
  
- if "false"(by default), the distance is measured between
+
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" form receiving "OnWindowDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
the inner (facing the client area) extent of the caption
+
  procedure unregisteronwiniddestroyed(const method: winideventty);
and the client area outward the area,
 
the caption is placed outside of the client area
 
  
- if "true", the caption is mirrored against the edge of client area as
+
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "ApplicationActiveChanged" events ( form-wide )
to the position when "false"
+
  procedure registeronapplicationactivechanged(const method: booleaneventty);
  
*** nagative values of "captiondist" visually inverse "out of" and within ***
+
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "ApplicationActiveChanged" events ( form-wide )
 +
  procedure unregisteronapplicationactivechanged(const method: booleaneventty);
  
      captionnoclip - do not clip frame and client area for caption background
+
// tcustomapplication
( the client area preserves own background under the caption text)
 
  
captionnooffset - shift orthogonal to "captiondist"
+
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnTerminated" event ( form-wide )
 +
  procedure registeronterminated(const method: notifyeventty);
  
captionpos - "corner" where to place the caption
+
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnTerminated" events ( form-wide )
 +
  procedure unregisteronterminated(const method: notifyeventty);
  
localprops :
+
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnTerminateQuery" event ( form-wide )
 +
  procedure registeronterminate(const method: terminatequeryeventty);
  
frl_levelo - "levelo" overrides "template.levelo"
+
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnTerminateQuery" event ( form-wide )
frl_leveli - "leveli" overrides "template.leveli"
+
  procedure unregisteronterminate(const method: terminatequeryeventty);
frl_framewidth - "framewidth" overrides "template.framewidth"
 
frl_colorclient - "colorclient" overrides "template.colorclient"
 
frl_colorframe - "colorframe" overrides "template.colorframe"
 
frl_colorframeactive - "colorframeactive" overrides "template.colorframeactive"
 
frl_colordkshadow - "colordkshadow" overrides "template.colordkshadow"
 
frl_colorshadow - "colorshadow" overrides "template.colorshadow"
 
frl_colorlight - "colorlight" overrides "template.colorlight"
 
frl_colorhighlight - "colorhighlight" overrides "template.colorhighlight"
 
frl_colordkwidth - "colordkwidth" overrides "template.colordkwidth"
 
frl_colorhlwidth - "colorhlwidth" overrides "template.colorhlwidth"
 
frl_fileft - "framei_left" overrides "template.framei_left"
 
frl_firight - "framei_right" overrides "template.framei_right"
 
frl_fitop - "framei_top" overrides "template.framei_top"
 
frl_fibottom - "framei_bottom" overrides "template.framei_bottom"
 
  
frl_nodisable
+
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnIdle" event ( form-wide )
 +
  procedure registeronidle(const method: idleeventty);
  
=== TFaceComp ===
+
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnIdle" events ( form-wide )
- doesn't affect the widget frame but client area of the frame
+
  procedure unregisteronidle(const method: idleeventty);
  
 +
  // calls "canclose" of all application windows except the "sender" window
 +
  // if all "canclose"are TRUE then checks "OnTerminateQuery"
 +
  // for all its subscribers ( usually forms of the application )
 +
  procedure terminate(const sender: twindow = nil);
  
template:
+
  // TRUE as long as a "terminate" call is in progress
fade:
+
  function terminating: boolean;
color[i]: = colors forming the fade
 
direction: = direction where the fade grows to
 
gd_(right/up/left/down)
 
  
pos[i]: = relational position of color[i] on the direction (0.0..1.0) extent
+
  // TRUE as long as a "deinitialize" call is in progress
 +
  function deinitializing: boolean;
 +
 
 +
  // returns the current caret object ( the text input focus indicator ) of the application
 +
  / ( this object provides facilities to control position & appearance & visibility & timings of the caret )
 +
  property caret: tcaret read fcaret;
  
transparency = makes the face half-transparent and enlight the underlying widget 
+
  // returns the current mouse object of the application
with a light source of the selected color
+
  / ( this object provides facitities to control position & appearance of the mouse ) 
( in this case, colors of the face & the widget & the light source
+
  property mouse: tmouse read fmouse;
simply summarize to higher brightness )
 
  
image:
+
  // simulates mouseparkevent
see <any image>
+
  // ( an adjusting mouse movement without user intervention - grid snapping, docking etc ?)
 +
  procedure mouseparkevent;
  
options:
+
  // sets mouse position correction for further mouse events,
 +
  // the real position is less the visual one by the supplied shift
 +
  procedure delayedmouseshift(const ashift: pointty);
  
        *** The fade colors are used not as colors but RGB alpha values ($00 -> opaque, $ff -> transparent)  
+
  // returns/sets a cursor shape used for widgets having their cursor shape set to "cr_default";
if fao_alpha* are set *** :
+
  // setting it to "cr_default" restores the individual widget cursor(s)
 +
  property widgetcursorshape: cursorshapety read fwidgetcursorshape write
 +
                                        fwidgetcursorshape;
  
fao_alphafadeall = applies blending to the widget & all its childs
+
  // returns/sets the current application-wide cursor shape ( not "watches" if a waiting dialog is currently displayed ! )
fao_alphafadenochildren = preserves child widgets from blending
+
  // or request to set a new cursor shape ( app-wide );
                fao_alphafadeimage = applies blending to "face.image"  
+
  // doesn't change when changing mouse widgets
 +
  //
 +
  // if called from a non-main app thread & no waiting dialogue displayed then redraws
 +
  // the cursor immediately;
 +
  // set it to "cr_default" to restore the shape to one set by "widgetcursorshape"
 +
  //
 +
  property cursorshape: cursorshapety; // cr_arrow, cr_*
  
 +
  // assures the displayed mouse cursor shape to be the shape assigned to the currently under-mouse widget,
 +
  // otherwise "cr_default"
 +
  procedure updatecursorshape; //restores cursorshape of mousewidget
  
<any face>
+
  // returns a widget of the application where the mouse is currently positioned over
 +
  property mousewidget: twidget read fmousewidget;
  
*** extends & customizes "tfacecomp" ***
+
  // returns a widget of the application currently "owning" the mouse ( grabbing all mouse input )
 +
  property mousecapturewidget: twidget read fmousecapturewidget;
  
fade, image, option
 
- see "tfacecomp"
 
 
template
 
- "tfacecomp" supplying the initial settings
 
  
localprops :
+
  // returns/sets a window to become the main window of the application
fal_options - "options" overrides "template.options"
+
  // then resets all other application windows to the window group it belongs to ( Linux only );
fal_fadirection - "fade.direction" overrides "template.fade.direction"
+
  //
fal_image - "image" overrides "template.image"
+
  // the main window minimizes all windows if minimized;
fal_fapos - "fade.pos[i]" overrides "template.fade.pos[i]"
+
  property mainwindow: twindow read fmainwindow write setmainwindow;
fal_facolor - "fade.color[i]" overrides "template.fade.color[i]"
 
fal_fatransparency - "fade.transparency" overrides "template.fade.transparency"
 
  
=== TBitmapComp ===
+
  // returns which system thread was allocated to the application on its start
=== TImageList ===
+
  // ( the main thread )
=== TPopupMenu ===
+
  property thread: threadty read fthread;
=== TMainMenu ===
 
  
== Dialog ==
+
  // returns teh widget where a mouse button click occured last time
=== TFileListview ===
+
  // ( to compare with when determinibg whether another widget is clicked )
=== TFileDialog ===
+
  property buttonpresswidgetbefore: twidget read fbuttonpresswidgetbefore;
=== TFaceComp ===
 
=== TFileNameEdit ===
 
=== TDirDropdownEdit ===
 
=== TColorEdit ===
 
=== TMemoDialogEdit ===
 
=== TPageSizeSelector ===
 
=== TPageOrientationSelector ===
 
  
== Application ==
+
  // returns teh widget where a mouse button release occured last time
=== TGuiApplication ===
+
  // ( to compare with when determinibg whether another widget is clicked )
<pre>
+
  property buttonreleasewidgetbefore: twidget read fbuttonreleasewidgetbefore;
tguiapplication = class(tcustomapplication)
 
  public
 
  
  // [re]starts the system timer with the new period and
 
  // subscribes the application to be a receiver of the modified "ek_timer" event
 
  // ( can check for it in the event queue )
 
  procedure settimer(const us: integer);
 
  
   // finds a window by its winID
+
   // returns/sets the interval of mouse double click recognition ( in microsecs ),
   function findwindow(id: winidty; out window: twindow): boolean;
+
   // defaults to 0.4 sec
 +
  property dblclicktime: integer read fdblclicktime write fdblclicktime default
 +
                defaultdblclicktime; //us
  
  // finds a window by its ID & adjusts "rect" so that it
+
// tcustomapplication
  // fits "bounds_minc*" & "bounds_maxc*" of the found window
 
  procedure checkwindowrect(winid: winidty; var rect: rectty);
 
  
   // inits the timer and "megraphics"
+
   // creates a datamodule instance ( its startup code including "OnLoaded" is executed )
   procedure initialize;
+
   procedure createdatamodule(instanceclass: msecomponentclassty; var reference);
  
  // frees the allocated system resources (GDI, event subsription, the timer)
 
  procedure deinitialize;
 
  
   // creates a form instance, it will be shown in "application.run"
+
   // enters the application event loop;
   procedure createform(instanceclass: widgetclassty; var reference);
+
  //
 +
  // once the loop finishes, performs "OnTerminated" for all its subscribers,
 +
   // destroys all application forms ( components & windows )
 +
  procedure run;
  
   // invalidates all registered forms ( all their widgets will be redrawn )
+
   // TRUE if the eventloop is entered
  procedure invalidate;
+
   function running: boolean;
 
 
  // calls a nested main eventloop, forces processing any pending messages,
 
   procedure processmessages; override; //handle with care!
 
  
   // TRUE if no pending events to process for the application
+
   // returns/sets the application name
   function idle: boolean; override;
+
  // ( defaults to the full path to application executable in the native OS format );
 +
  // currently, only for informatiion query purposes
 +
   property applicationname: msestring read fapplicationname write fapplicationname;
 
    
 
    
  // requests to indicate waiting ( to show the "watches" cursos )
 
  procedure beginwait; override;
 
  
   // removes the "watches" if no unclosed requests for displaying them,
+
   // if exclusive "rights" are satisfied for the main thread ( a mutex lock is OK )  & the event loop is in progress
   // otherwise closes the currently active request
+
  // then posts the "event" to the main application thread for asyc processing,
   procedure endwait; override;
+
   // otherwise adds the event to the internal list for further handling as soon as the above conditions meet
 +
   procedure postevent(event: tevent);
 +
 
 +
  // TRUE if never idle since last call,
 +
  // unlocks the application and calls sleep if not mainthread and asleepus >= 0
 +
  function checkoverload(const asleepus: integer = 100000): boolean;
 +
 
 +
  // returns/sets the application exception handler
 +
  property onexception: exceptioneventty read fonexception write fonexception;
  
   // TRUE if there're unclosed requests for displaying "watches"
+
   // if not "eabort" & no unhandled exceptions,
   function waiting: boolean;
+
  // executes the above "OnException" code if assigned
 +
  // or shows an exception message otherwise;
 +
   procedure handleexception(sender: tobject = nil;
 +
                                      const leadingtext: string = '');
  
   // TRUE if ESC has just been pressed
+
   // synchronizes the calling thread with the main event loop ( via a mutex),
   // - if all requests for displaying "watches" are closed then refreshes
+
   // TRUE if the calling thread allready holds the mutex,
   //   the internal list of events ( the GUI-queue -> the app event list)
+
   // the mutex is recursive
   function waitescaped: boolean; //true if escape pressed while waiting
+
   function lock: boolean;
  
   // sets state of the current wait dialogue ( but doesn't close one ) to undefined
+
   // tries to synchronize the calling thread with the main event loop ( via a mutex)
   procedure resetwaitdialog;  
+
   function trylock: boolean;
  
   // runs "aexecuteaction" in the main thread in OnIdle mode,
+
   // releases the mutex if the calling thread holds the mutex,
  // then shows a cancellable message,
+
   // TRUE if no unlock done
  // if the one is cancelled then runs "acancelaction" then
+
   function unlock: boolean;
  // either fully clears (if exceptions occur )
 
  // or terminates the execution otherwise,
 
   // true if not cancelled;
 
  // "application.processmessages" must be called regularly if "aexecuteaction" is used here,
 
  // alternatively "aidleaction" can be used, call sleep ( some time ) in order to minimize
 
  // processor load.
 
  // If athread <> nil the function starts and terminates the thread   
 
   function waitdialog(const athread: tthreadcomp = nil; const atext: msestring = '';
 
                  const caption: msestring = '';
 
                  const acancelaction: notifyeventty = nil;
 
                  const aexecuteaction: notifyeventty = nil): boolean; override;
 
  
   // closes the currently modal waitdialogue with "cancelled" state
+
   // releases the mutex recursively if the calling thread holds the mutex,
   procedure cancelwait;
+
  // returns "count" for the below "relockall"
 +
   function unlockall: integer;
  
   // closes the currently modal waitdialogue with "ok" state
+
   // regains the mutex to serve "count" locks
   procedure terminatewait;
+
   procedure relockall(count: integer);
  
   function waitstarted: boolean;  // the last waitdialogue is currently showing for some requests
+
   // creates a syncronize event ( which will fire asyncronously then waits for another thread will allow it to finish ), assigns "proc" to it as the event handler,
   function waitcanceled: boolean; // the last waitdialogue has been cancelled for some request (but can be shown fot others ?)
+
   // then frees all locks temporarily then posts the event to the app event queue & waits fot it to be processed the resores the locks;
   function waitterminated: boolean; // the last waitdialogue has been terminated for some request (but can be shown fot others ?)  
+
  //
 +
  // TRUE if not aborted, quiet -> shows no exceptions if occurs
 +
  //
 +
  // the "syncronize event" is an event owning a semaphore which can be touched by another thread
 +
   // thus causing "event.waitfo" to return & to exec the event handler code
 +
  //
 +
  function synchronize(const proc: objectprocty;
 +
                      const quite: boolean = false): boolean;
  
   // if called from the main app thread then shows as a modal message describing the exception
+
   // TRUE if the calling ( this function ) thread is the application main thread
   // otherwise posts an async event for which the message will be called
+
   function ismainthread: boolean;
  procedure showexception(e: exception; const leadingtext: string = ''); override;
 
  
   // posts an async event for which the message describing the exception will be called
+
   // TRUE if the currently locked thread is the application main thread
   procedure showasyncexception(e: exception; const leadingtext: string = '');
+
   function islockthread: boolean;
  
   // "application.errormessage" shows standard error message ( with "ERROR" title )
+
   // waith for "athread" to terminate,
   procedure errormessage(const amessage: msestring); override;
+
  // does "unlock-relock" around waiting
 +
   procedure waitforthread(athread: tmsethread);
  
   // [re]calculates timings & position of hint for "ahintedwidget"
+
   // post a "nothing-to-do" event for asynchronous processing in the main thread
  // if "ow_timedhint" in "ahintedwidget.foptionswidget" then iys showtime will be
+
   procedure wakeupmainthread;
  // "defaulthintshowtime" ( an app wide setting, 3sec by default) 
 
   procedure inithintinfo(var info: hintinfoty; const ahintedwidget: twidget);
 
  
 +
  // invalidates all registered forms of the application so that their widgets redraw land-specific captions
 +
  // ( changed by "mseconsts.setlangconsts" ),
 +
  // called internally in "setlangconsts" before return
 +
  procedure langchanged; virtual;
  
   // shows the supplied hint text within "aposrect" with alignment "aplacement" during "ashowtime",
+
   // returns/sets "aps_terminated" state flag ( no actions ? )
  // the avail ( but not used currenly ) flags are : hfl_show,hfl_custom,hfl_noautohidemove,hfl_noautohidemove 
+
   // this flag is also set internally by "terminate" if not cancelled
   procedure showhint(const sender: twidget; const hint: msestring;
+
  property terminated: boolean read getterminated write setterminated;
              const aposrect: rectty; const aplacement: captionposty = cp_bottomleft;
 
              const ashowtime: integer = defaulthintshowtime; //0 -> inifinite,
 
                // -1 defaultshowtime if ow_timedhint in sender.optionswidget
 
              const aflags: hintflagsty = defaulthintflags
 
                      ); overload;
 
  
   // shows the supplied hint text at left-top position"apos" during "ashowtime",
+
   // returns the number of "handleexception" calls having an effect ( a message or the handler code )
  // the avail ( but not used currenly ) flags are : hfl_show,hfl_custom,hfl_noautohidemove,hfl_noautohidemove 
+
   property exceptioncount: longword read fexceptioncount;
   procedure showhint(const sender: twidget; const hint: msestring;
 
              const apos: pointty;
 
              const ashowtime: integer = defaulthintshowtime; //0 -> inifinite,
 
                // -1 defaultshowtime if ow_timedhint in sender.optionswidget
 
              const aflags: hintflagsty = defaulthintflags
 
                      ); overload;
 
  
  // shows the hint fully defined in "info" for the widget "sender"
 
  procedure showhint(const sender: twidget; const info: hintinfoty); overload;
 
  
  // removes the current hint widget & frees its resources & stops its stop timer
+
private
  procedure hidehint;
+
// function tinternalapplication.beginmodal(const sender: twindow): boolean;
  
  // restarts the current hint and its stop timer
+
</pre>
  procedure restarthint(const sender: twidget);
 
  
  function hintedwidget: twidget; //last hinted widget
+
== DB ==
  function activehintedwidget: twidget; //nil if no hint active
 
  
  // returns helpcontext of active widget, '' if none;    
+
=== DBedit ===
  function activehelpcontext: msestring;
+
=== DBfields ===
 +
=== TDBwidgetgrid ===
 +
<pre>
 +
   Properties:
  
  // returns helpcontext of the widget under mouse, '' if none;
+
        anchors - ...
  function mousehelpcontext: msestring;
+
bounds - ...
  
  // TRUE if one of the app's window/console is in input focus
+
color
  function active: boolean;
+
- color of the grid's client area
 +
cursor
 +
- cursor shape when the mouse is over the client area
  
  // returns the desktop resolution ( or the virtual one if used )
+
datacols
  function screensize: sizety;
+
colorselect
 +
linecolor
 +
linecolorfix
 +
linewidth
 +
newrowcol
  
  // returns the (virtual) desktop resolution except the tray area,
+
options
  // nil -> current active window
+
co_readonly
  function workarea(const awindow: twindow = nil): rectty;
+
co_nofocus
 
+
co_invisible
  // returns which application window ( a form not an eventwidget, an openglwidget or a windowwidget !)
+
co_disabled
  // is active ( provides the input focus ),
+
co_drawfocus
  // it's same for all widgets of the form served by this window
+
co_mousemovefocus
  function activewindow: twindow;
+
co_lefbuttonfocusonly
 
+
co_focusselect
/ * A transient window is a descendant of ( "transientfor" ) another window in the stacking order hierarchy */
+
co_mouseselect
 
+
co_keyselect
  // returns a first non-transient ( on top of the app stacking order ) window upward
+
co_multiselect
  // from the currently active window of the application.
+
co_resetselectionexit
  // or that active window if no such
+
co_rowselect
  function regularactivewindow: twindow;
+
co_fixwidth
 +
co_fixpos
 +
co_fill
 +
co_proportional
 +
co_nohscroll
 +
co_savevalue
 +
co_savestate
 +
co_rowfont
 +
co_rowcolor
 +
co_zebracolor
 +
co_nosort
 +
co_sortdescent
 +
co_norearrange
 +
co_cancopy
 +
co_canpaste
 +
co_mousescrollrow
 +
co_rowdatachange
  
  // same as "activewindow" but the window must not be released (?)
+
sortcol
  function unreleasedactivewindow: twindow;
+
width
  
  // returns the focused widget of the currently active window if one exists
+
items[N]
  function activewidget: twidget;
+
color
 
+
colorselect
  // returns the widget presenteing the currently active window
+
datalist - ???
  function activerootwidget: twidget;
+
face - see <any face>
 
+
fontselect - see <any font>
  // returns the window ( not hidden or disabled !) under the screen point "pos"
+
frame - see <any frame>
  function windowatpos(const pos: pointty): twindow;
+
linecolor
 +
linecolorfix
 +
linewidth
 +
name
 +
 +
options
 +
 +
</pre>
  
  // puts to "awidget" the container of widget pointed by "namepath"
+
=== Report ===
  // ( finalizing "." is discarded if found ) ,
 
  // FALSE if not found, and NIL and TRUE if "namepath" = ''
 
  function findwidget(const namepath: string; out awidget: twidget): boolean;
 
  
  // rebuilds the application's window list accorrding to the current on-screen Z-order of its windows;
+
==== TRepSpacer ====
  // window list is ordered by "z" - bottom first & top last;
+
==== TRecordBand ====
  // invisibles first
+
==== TrepValueDisp ====
  procedure sortzorder;
+
==== TRepPageNumdisp ====
 +
==== TRepPrintDateDisp ====
 +
==== TBandGroup ====
 +
==== TTileArea ====
  
  // returns a copy of the internal window list of application
+
== Design ==
  function windowar: windowarty;
 
  
  // returns the list of application window winIDs
+
=== TGdbMi ===
  function winidar: winidarty;
+
=== TSyntaxEdit ===
 +
=== TSyntaxPainter ===
  
  // returns the count of the application windows   
+
== Comm ==
  function windowcount: integer;
 
  
  // returns the window by its number ( "index" >= 0) in the application window list
+
=== TCommPort ===
  property windows[const index: integer]: twindow read getwindows;
+
=== TAsciiCommPort ===
 +
=== TAsciiProtPort ===
 +
=== TCommSelector ===
  
  // returns the lowest visible window in stackorder,
+
== General stuff==
  // calls "sortzorder" within
 
  function bottomwindow: twindow;
 
  
  // returns the highest visible window in stackorder,
+
=== Properties for all widgets ===
  // calls "sortzorder" within
+
<pre>
  function topwindow: twindow;
 
  
 +
name
  
  // TRUE if all owned windows pass "CanClose" check or
+
anchors
  // don't have focused widgets
 
  function candefocus: boolean;
 
  
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive keyboard events
+
-----------
  procedure registeronkeypress(const method: keyeventty);
 
  
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving keyboard events
+
- they control of design/runtime sticking widgets to their parents
  procedure unregisteronkeypress(const method: keyeventty);
 
  
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive shortcut events
+
- dimention pair ( top/bottom or left/right ) both set to "false" cause
  procedure registeronshortcut(const method: keyeventty);
+
the widget to fit the parent's client area in that dimention;
 +
this effect may be partial in case of "bounds_c*max" settings limit the extents
  
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving shortcut events
+
*** Return to the look "before dimention fit" is only possible by manual resizing or setting "bounds_*"
  procedure unregisteronshortcut(const method: keyeventty);
+
-----------
 +
an_left
 +
- on run-time, resizes/shifts left the widget to keep the design-set distance
 +
between the widget's left border and the left side of parent's client area
 +
as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins
 +
 
 +
an_top
 +
- on run-time, resizes/shifts up the widget to keep the design-set distance
 +
between the widget's top border and the upper side of parent's client area
 +
as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins
  
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnWindowActiveChanged" event ( form-wide )
+
an_right
  procedure registeronactivechanged(const method: activechangeeventty);
+
- on run-time, resizes/shifts right the widget to keep the design-set distance
 +
between the widget's right border and the right side of parent's client area
 +
as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins
  
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnWindowActiveChanged" event ( form-wide )
+
an_bottom
  procedure unregisteronactivechanged(const method: activechangeeventty);
+
- on run-time, resizes/shifts down the widget to keep the design-set distance
 +
between the widget's bottom border and the lower side of parent's client area
 +
as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins
  
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
+
bounds
  procedure registeronwindowdestroyed(const method: windoweventty);
 
  
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
+
cx - width of the widget
  procedure unregisteronwindowdestroyed(const method: windoweventty);
+
cxmax, cxmin - design/runtime width of the widget is enforced between "cxmax" and "cxmin"
 +
cy - height of the widget
 +
cymax, cymin - design/runtime height of the widget is enforced between "cymax" and "cymin"
 +
x - distance between the widget's left border and the left side of parent's client area
 +
y - distance between the widget's top border and the upper side of parent's client area
  
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnWindowDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
 
  procedure registeronwiniddestroyed(const method: winideventty);
 
  
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" form receiving "OnWindowDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
+
autosize
  procedure unregisteronwiniddestroyed(const method: winideventty);
 
  
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "ApplicationActiveChanged" events ( form-wide )
+
-----------
  procedure registeronapplicationactivechanged(const method: booleaneventty);
+
- only applicable to widgets with "ow_autosize" set
 +
- the effect may be partial in case when "bounds_c*max" settings limit the extents
 +
-----------
  
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "ApplicationActiveChanged" events ( form-wide )
+
cx - addition to width of the widget (with h-centering post applied)
  procedure unregisteronapplicationactivechanged(const method: booleaneventty);
+
cy - addition to height of the widget (with v-centering post applied)
  
// tcustomapplication
+
- color
 +
= the default color of client area & caption text background
 +
= may be overwritten:
 +
* the client area - with "frame.colorclient"
 +
* the caption BG - with "frame.font.colorbackground"
  
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnTerminated" event ( form-wide )
+
- font
  procedure registeronterminated(const method: notifyeventty);
+
= see {any font}
  
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnTerminated" events ( form-wide )
+
- frame
  procedure unregisteronterminated(const method: notifyeventty);
+
= see {any frame}
  
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnTerminateQuery" event ( form-wide )
+
- face
  procedure registeronterminate(const method: terminatequeryeventty);
+
= see {any face}
  
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnTerminateQuery" event ( form-wide )
+
- hint
  procedure unregisteronterminate(const method: terminatequeryeventty);
+
= descriptive text appearing when mouse pointer enters the widget
  
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnIdle" event ( form-wide )
+
- cursor
  procedure registeronidle(const method: idleeventty);
+
= shape of the mouse pointer over the client area of widget (run-time only)
  
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnIdle" events ( form-wide )
+
- visible
  procedure unregisteronidle(const method: idleeventty);
+
= "true" allow the widget to appear ( run-time only )
  
  // calls "canclose" of all application windows except the "sender" window
+
- enabled
  // if all "canclose"are TRUE then checks "OnTerminateQuery"
+
= "true" allows the widget to participate in GUI interaction
  // for all its subscribers ( usually forms of the application )
+
= "false" disallows the widget & its children :
  procedure terminate(const sender: twindow = nil);
+
* processing all events & shortcuts & menu calls
 +
* auto "CanClose" check
  
  // TRUE as long as a "terminate" call is in progress
+
Also "false" usually paints the widget in color marking
  function terminating: boolean;
+
the "disabled" state ( usually light gray font color )
  
  // TRUE as long as a "deinitialize" call is in progress
+
- popupmenu
  function deinitializing: boolean;
+
= reference to a preset tpopupmenu widget serving the right-click menu
 
 
  // returns the current caret object ( the text input focus indicator ) of the application
 
  / ( this object provides facitities to control position & appearance & visibility & timings of the caret )
 
  property caret: tcaret read fcaret;
 
  
  // returns the current mouse object of the application
+
- taborder
  / ( this object provides facitities to control position & appearance of the mouse ) 
+
- {0..N} order number when TAB-key cycling through widgets in the container
  property mouse: tmouse read fmouse;
 
  
  // simulates mouseparkevent
+
- tag
  // ( an adjusting mouse movement without user intervention - grid snapping, docking etc ?)
+
- an integer value bound to this widget instance
  procedure mouseparkevent;
 
  
  // sets mouse position correction for further mouse events,
+
- helpcontext
  // the real position is less the visual one by the supplied shift
+
= a string returned by "(active/mouse)helpcontext" methods of the owning form
  procedure delayedmouseshift(const ashift: pointty);
+
  when this widget is focused or under mouse in the active window
  
  // returns/sets a cursor shape used for widgets having their cursor shape set to "cr_default";
+
- zorder
  // setting it to "cr_default" restores the individual widget cursor(s)
+
= reading: finds the current Z-order of the widget's window
  property widgetcursorshape: cursorshapety read fwidgetcursorshape write
+
= setting: if the value = 0 then lowers the widget's window in the stacking hierarchy, otherwise rises
                                        fwidgetcursorshape;
 
  
  // returns/sets the current application-wide cursor shape ( not "watches" if a waiting dialogue is curerntly displayed ! )
 
  // or request to set a new cursor shape ( app-wide );
 
  // doesn't change when changing mouse widgets
 
  //
 
  // if called from a non-main app thread & no waiting dialogue displayed then redraws
 
  // the cursor immediately;
 
  // set it to "cr_default" to restore the shape to one set by "widgetcursorshape"
 
  //
 
  property cursorshape: cursorshapety; // cr_arrow, cr_*
 
  
  // assures the displayed mouse cursor shape to be the shape assigned to the currently under-mouse widget,
+
optionswidget:
  // otherwise "cr_default"
 
  procedure updatecursorshape; //restores cursorshape of mousewidget
 
  
  // returns a widget of the application where the mouse is currently positioned over
+
ow_background
  property mousewidget: twidget read fmousewidget;
+
- keeps the window/widget on bottom of the Z-order stack.
  
  // returns a widget of the application currently "owning" the mouse ( grabbing all mouse input )
+
ow_top
  property mousecapturewidget: twidget read fmousecapturewidget;
+
- keeps the window/widget in foreground
  
 +
ow_noautosizing
 +
- when docking, not to resize for the docking area
  
  // returns/sets a window to become the main window of the application
+
ow_mousefocus
  // then resets all other application windows to the window group it belongs to ( Linux only );
+
- "false" here disables focusing the widget with mouse
  //
+
  ( and "OnFocus" doesn't fire on mouse clicks )
  // the main window minimizes all windows if minimized;
 
  property mainwindow: twindow read fmainwindow write setmainwindow;
 
  
  // returns which system thread was allocated to the application on its start
+
ow_tabfocus
  // ( the main thread )
+
- "false" here disables focusing the widget with "TAB" key
  property thread: threadty read fthread;
+
  ( and "OnFocus" doesn't fire on TAB pressed )
  
  // returns teh widget where a mouse button click occured last time
+
ow_parenttabfocus
  // ( to compare with when determinibg whether another widget is clicked )
+
- enters the childs on TAB-focusing then returns to the widget after
  property buttonpresswidgetbefore: twidget read fbuttonpresswidgetbefore;
+
sequential TAB-ing through its child widgets,
 +
otherwise TAB-ing cycles on the children if entered
  
  // returns teh widget where a mouse button release occured last time
+
ow_arrowfocus
  // ( to compare with when determinibg whether another widget is clicked )
+
- allows the widget ( and its children in turn ) to be focused with  
  property buttonreleasewidgetbefore: twidget read fbuttonreleasewidgetbefore;
+
the arrow keys
  
 +
ow_subfocus, ow_arrowfocusin, ow_arrowfocusout
 +
- in case of arrow keys focusing enabled for child-containing widget,
 +
determine behaviour on entering & leaving the widget, see the below table:
  
  // returns/sets the interval of mouse double click recognition ( in microsecs),
+
ow_subfocus | ow_arrowfocusin | ow_arrowfocusout | effect
  // defaults to 0.4 sec
 
  property dblclicktime: integer read fdblclicktime write fdblclicktime default
 
                defaultdblclicktime; //us
 
  
// tcustomapplication
+
  FALSE          FALSE            FALSE        entering-/leaving-
 
+
  FALSE          FALSE            TRUE          entering-/leaving+
  // creates a datamodule instance ( its startup code including "OnLoaded" is executed )
+
  FALSE          TRUE              FALSE        entering(nearest)+/leaving-
  procedure createdatamodule(instanceclass: msecomponentclassty; var reference);
+
  FALSE          TRUE              TRUE          entering(nearest)+/leaving+
 +
  TRUE            FALSE            FALSE        entering(last focused)+/leaving-
 +
  TRUE            FALSE            TRUE          entering(last focused)+/leaving+
 +
  TRUE            TRUE              FALSE        entering(nearest)+/leaving-
 +
  TRUE            TRUE              TRUE          entering(nearest)+/leaving+
 +
 
 +
- "entering" is focusing on a child within the widget
 +
- "leaving"  is return from last child onto the widget's level
 +
- "nearest" is the child closest on the arrow direction
 +
- "last focused" is the child focused on last leaving the widget
 +
 +
*** The Up/Down arrow keys can leave from the children circle,
 +
but Left/Right can only toggle between the children ***
  
 +
*** mouse entering/leaving isn't controllable by these options
  
  // enters the application event loop;
 
  //
 
  // once the loop finishes, performs "OnTerminated" for all its subscribers,
 
  // destroys all application forms ( components & windows )
 
  procedure run;
 
  
  // TRUE if the eventloop is entered
+
ow_focusbackonesc
  function running: boolean;
+
- on pressing "Esc", returns input focus to the previously focused widget
  
  // returns/sets the application name
+
ow_noparentshortcut
  // ( defaults to the full path to application executable in the native OS format );
 
  // currently, only for informatiion query purposes
 
  property applicationname: msestring read fapplicationname write fapplicationname;
 
 
 
  
  // if exclusive "rights" are satisfied for the main thread ( a mutex lock is OK )  & the event loop is in progress
+
*** disables processing of delegated ( from the parent ) shortcuts ***
  // then posts the "event" to the main application thread for asyc processing,
 
  // otherwise adds the event to the internal list for further handling as soon as the above conditions meet
 
  procedure postevent(event: tevent);
 
  
  // TRUE if never idle since last call,
+
- "true" here disables processing shortcuts if they're delegated
  // unlocks the application and calls sleep if not mainthread and asleepus >= 0
+
from the parent widget ( obviously, not processed by the parent )
  function checkoverload(const asleepus: integer = 100000): boolean;
 
  
  // returns/sets the application exception handler
+
ow_nochildshortcut
  property onexception: exceptioneventty read fonexception write fonexception;
 
  
  // if not "eabort" & no unhandled exceptions,
+
*** disables delegating shortcuts to the parent for taking decision ***
  // executes the above "OnException" code if assigned
 
  // or shows an exception message otherwise;
 
  procedure handleexception(sender: tobject = nil;
 
                                      const leadingtext: string = '');
 
  
  // synchronizes the calling thread with the main event loop ( via a mutex),
+
- if "true" then the widget tries to process it by oneself
  // TRUE if the calling thread allready holds the mutex,
+
otherwise it's passed to the parent widget for further chaining
  // the mutex is recursive
 
  function lock: boolean;
 
  
  // tries to synchronize the calling thread with the main event loop ( via a mutex)
+
*** A shortcut can only be processed once ( by one widget ) ***
  function trylock: boolean;
 
  
  // releases the mutex if the calling thread holds the mutex,
+
ow_canclosenil
  // TRUE if no unlock done
+
- "true" here allows to continue even if there's contained widget(s)
  function unlock: boolean;
+
not passing "CanClose" check
  
  // releases the mutex recursively if the calling thread holds the mutex,
+
ow_mousetransparent
  // returns "count" for the below "relockall"
+
- "true" here causes the widget oneself ( not its contained ones )
  function unlockall: integer;
+
not to react to mouse events ( just allow them through to the children )
  
  // regains the mutex to serve "count" locks
+
ow_mousewheel
  procedure relockall(count: integer);
+
- enables/disables {scrolling/navigating} with wheel of ImPS/2 etc mouse
  
  // creates a syncronize event ( which will fire asyncronously then waits for another thread will allow it to finish ), assigns "proc" to it as the event handler,  
+
ow_noscroll
  // then frees all locks temporarily then posts the event to the app event queue & waits fot it to be processed the resores the locks;
+
- don't use screen image scrolling for twidget.scrollrect,  
  //
+
redraw the whole scrolled widget rectangle instead;
  // TRUE if not aborted, quiet -> shows no exceptions if occurs
+
sometimes needed with background fades.
  //
 
  // the "syncronize event" is an event owning a semaphore which can be touched by another thread
 
  // thus causing "event.waitfo" to return & to exec the event handler code
 
  //
 
  function synchronize(const proc: objectprocty;
 
                      const quite: boolean = false): boolean;
 
  
  // TRUE if the calling ( this function ) thread is the application main thread
+
ow_nochildpaintclip
  function ismainthread: boolean;
+
-
  
  // TRUE if the currently locked thread is the application main thread
+
ow_destroywidgets
  function islockthread: boolean;
+
- "true" here causes calling "free" for all containing widgets as well
  
  // waith for "athread" to terminate,
+
ow_hinton
  // does "unlock-relock" around waiting
+
- to show the hint even in case of hinting is disabled on the parent
  procedure waitforthread(athread: tmsethread);
+
( "parent.ow_hintoff= true & parent.ow_hinton= false" )
  
  // post a "nothing-to-do" event for asynchronous processing in the main thread
+
ow_hintoff
  procedure wakeupmainthread;
+
- "true" here combined with "ow_hinton=false" fully disables displaying the hint
  
  // invalidates all registered forms of the application so that their widgets redraw land-specific captions
+
ow_multiplehint
  // ( changed by "mseconsts.setlangconsts" ),
+
- "true" here causes the widget to redisplay its hint on each {>3px} move within the widget oneself
  // called internally in "setlangconsts" before return
 
  procedure langchanged; virtual;
 
  
  // returns/sets "aps_terminated" state flag ( no actions ? )
+
        ow_timedhint
  // this flag is also set internally by "terminate" if not cancelled
+
- "true" here causes hint of the widget to disappear after a timed inteval (about 2 secs by default)
  property terminated: boolean read getterminated write setterminated;
 
  
  // returns the number of "handleexception" calls having an effect ( a message or the handler code )
+
ow_fontlineheight (design-time only)
  property exceptioncount: longword read fexceptioncount;
+
- causes "extraspace" of the last text line to be drawn,
 +
in turn it causes adjustment of widget height if "ow_autoscale" is set
 +
 +
*** makes sence only if "ow_autoscale=true" & ow_autosize=false & "extraspace <> 0" ***
  
 +
ow_fontglyphheight (design-time only)
 +
- causes only interline "extraspace"-s to be drawn, opposite to "ow_fontlineheight"
  
private
+
ow_autoscale (design-time only)
// function tinternalapplication.beginmodal(const sender: twindow): boolean;
+
- causes that if the contents change (design OR run-time) so that its' height changes
 +
then the widget will be v-scaled as well
  
<pre/>
+
ow_autosize (design-time only)
 +
- causes that widget's height & width & client area adjust so that to provide space for contents of the client area
 +
- no design-time change of height/width are possible as long as this option is in effect
  
== DB ==
+
ow_autosizeanright
 +
- when autosizing & {an_right isn't set}, the design-set right margin against the parent is preserved
  
=== DBedit ===
+
ow_autosizeanbottom
=== DBfields ===
+
- when autosizing & {an_bottom isn't set}, the design-set bottom margin against the parent is preserved
=== TDBwidgetgrid ===
 
<pre>
 
  Properties:
 
  
        anchors - ...
+
optionsskin:
bounds - ...
+
 
 +
- osc_noskin
 +
- osc_framebuttononly
 +
- osc_container
 +
 
 +
 
 +
Methods:
  
color
+
  // tmsecomponent
- color of the grid's client area
 
cursor
 
- cursor shape when the mouse is over the client area
 
  
datacols
+
// (re)draws the widget according to the related skin if apllicable;
colorselect
+
//
linecolor
+
// also called internally by "loaded" procedure ( before "OnLoaded" code ),
linecolorfix
+
// by ShowMessage ( for the internal widgets of the message dialogue ),
linewidth
+
// when creating tab & form & menu widgets
newrowcol
+
procedure updateskin(const recursive: boolean = false);
 +
 
 +
// TRUE if the instance is created but not yet ready
 +
// for interaction & accessing data & appearance change & receiving events etc
 +
// ( the stage between firing "OnCreate" & "OnLoaded" )
 +
function loading: boolean;
 +
 +
{$ifdef FPC}
 +
procedure setinline(value: boolean); // ?
 +
procedure setancestor(value: boolean); // ?
 +
{$endif}
 +
 
 +
// TRUE if all conditios are OK for executing the code of "event" ( a handler must be assigned to the event )
 +
function canevent(const event: tmethod): boolean;
  
options
 
co_readonly
 
co_nofocus
 
co_invisible
 
co_disabled
 
co_drawfocus
 
co_mousemovefocus
 
co_lefbuttonfocusonly
 
co_focusselect
 
co_mouseselect
 
co_keyselect
 
co_multiselect
 
co_resetselectionexit
 
co_rowselect
 
co_fixwidth
 
co_fixpos
 
co_fill
 
co_proportional
 
co_nohscroll
 
co_savevalue
 
co_savestate
 
co_rowfont
 
co_rowcolor
 
co_zebracolor
 
co_nosort
 
co_sortdescent
 
co_norearrange
 
co_cancopy
 
co_canpaste
 
co_mousescrollrow
 
co_rowdatachange
 
  
sortcol
+
// Shortly, replaces the persistent storage of the widget
width
+
//
 +
// if {value <> nil} then
 +
// - if "instance" is nil then calls "createproc" to create the instance,
 +
//    then assigns the instance's value:= "value"
 +
// otherwise frees "instance"
 +
procedure setoptionalobject(const value: tpersistent; var instance;
 +
                        createproc: createprocty);
 +
 
 +
// creates the persistent storage of the widget via calling "createproc"
 +
procedure getoptionalobject(const instance: tobject; createproc: createprocty);
 +
 
 +
// obtains & puts to "obj" a CORBA interface entry for "aintf" (GUID,...)
 +
function getcorbainterface(const aintf: ptypeinfo; out obj) : boolean;
 +
 
 +
        // TRUE if the widget is owned, or "self" otherwise
 +
function checkowned(component: tcomponent): boolean;
 +
 
 +
        // TRUE if the widget is owner, or "self" otherwise
 +
function checkowner(component: tcomponent): boolean;
 +
 
 +
// return the top-most widget in owner chain starting from this widget
 +
function rootowner: tcomponent;
 +
 
 +
// return the array of owning widgets starting from this widget
 +
// componentarty[0] is the widget oneself
 +
function getrootcomponentpath: componentarty;
 +
 
 +
        // returns items of objeclinker ( which notify this widget )
 +
        // and free notify list ( which are notified by this widget ),
 +
        // duplicates are removed.
 +
        //
 +
        // Notifies mainly relate to insertion/removal operation on widgets
 +
        // The notify list is maintained by FreeNotification & RemoveFreeNotification
 +
function linkedobjects: objectarty;
 +
 
 +
// sends "event" recursively to child widgets until no more children or
 +
// the event is processed ( cea_processed ) by one of the children,
 +
// "event" will be destroyed if destroyevent= true and not async
 +
procedure sendcomponentevent(const event: tcomponentevent;
 +
                                        const destroyevent: boolean = true);
 +
 
 +
// sends "event" to each of owning widgets downward from the root owner,
 +
// "event" will be destroyed if destroyevent= true and not async
 +
procedure sendrootcomponentevent(const event: tcomponentevent;
 +
                                        const destroyevent: boolean = true);
 +
 
 +
// posts an async "atag"-ged event to be handled by oneself
 +
procedure asyncevent(atag: integer = 0);
 +
 
 +
// posts a "tcomponentevent" instance from sender=self,
 +
// "kind" is defined when creating the event,
 +
// and "tag" may be adjusted after creation
 +
procedure postcomponentevent(const event: tcomponentevent);
 +
 
 +
// returns the classname of the widget if the widget is toplevel,
 +
// and "tmsecomponent" otherwise )
 +
property moduleclassname: string read getmoduleclassname;
 +
 
 +
// returns the classname of the widget as the entry of its constructor
 +
// ( button => tbutton, datamodule => tdm1mo, form => ttstfo, dbstringedit => tdbstringedit,.. )
 +
property actualclassname: string read getactualclassname;
 +
 
 +
// returns "fmsecomponentstate"
 +
// ( a set of cs_ismodule,cs_endreadproc,cs_loadedproc,cs_noload, cs_hasskin,cs_noskin )
 +
property msecomponentstate: msecomponentstatesty read fmsecomponentstate;
 +
 
 +
// returns/sets a pointer associated with the widget
 +
// ( contrary to the integer "tag", allows to use an arbitary data type
 +
// for associating data )
 +
property tagpo: pointer read ftagpo write ftagpo;
 +
 
 +
// returns/sets a string identifying the widget in the help system
 +
property helpcontext: msestring read gethelpcontext write fhelpcontext;
 +
 
 +
// twidget
 +
 
 +
// creates an instance of the widget, owned by "aowner" if not NIL
 +
constructor create(aowner: tcomponent); override;
 +
 
 +
destructor destroy; override;
 +
 
 +
// ??
 +
procedure afterconstruction; override;
 +
 
 +
// rescales the widget frame ( if assigned ) then owned widgets ( if exist, recursively ) then bounds_* then the font ( if assigned )
 +
// called before inserting in parentwidget,
 +
// calls "scale(ascale)",
 +
// no visual repainting
 +
procedure initnewcomponent(const ascale: real); virtual;
 +
 
 +
// restores the "fontheight" to "font.glyphheight" if "ow_fontglyphheight" or
 +
// to "font.lineheight" if "ow_fontlineheight" otherwise,
 +
// ascale is ignored ?
 +
// calls "synctofontheight->setfontheight",
 +
// called after inserting in parentwidget,
 +
// no visual repainting
 +
procedure initnewwidget(const ascale: real); virtual;
 +
 
 +
// creates the widget frame if not yet created
 +
procedure createframe;
 +
 
 +
// creates the widget face if not yet  created
 +
procedure createface;
 +
 
 +
// creates the widget font if not yet  created
 +
procedure createfont;
 +
 
 +
// checks ws_loadlock and csdestroing too
 +
function isloading: boolean;
 +
 
 +
// returns "widgetstatety" - a set of (
 +
// ws_visible,ws_enabled,ws_active,ws_entered,ws_entering,ws_exiting,
 +
// ws_focused,ws_mouseinclient,ws_wantmousebutton,ws_wantmousemove,
 +
// ws_wantmousefocus,ws_iswidget,ws_opaque,ws_nopaint,
 +
// ws_clicked,ws_mousecaptured,ws_clientmousecaptured,
 +
// ws_loadlock,ws_loadedproc,ws_showproc,ws_minclientsizevalid,
 +
// ws_showed,ws_hidden, //used in tcustomeventwidget
 +
// ws_destroying,ws_staticframe,ws_staticface,ws_isvisible
 +
//
 +
// iframe
 +
function widgetstate: widgetstatesty;
 +
 
 +
// returns "widgetstate1ty" - a set of (
 +
// (ws1_childscaled,ws1_fontheightlock,
 +
// ws1_widgetregionvalid,ws1_rootvalid,
 +
// ws1_anchorsizing,ws1_isstreamed,
 +
// ws1_scaled, //used in tcustomscalingwidget
 +
// ws1_noclipchildren,
 +
// ws1_nodesignvisible,ws1_nodesignframe,ws1_nodesignhandles,
 +
// ws1_nodesigndelete,ws1_designactive,
 +
// ws1_fakevisible,ws1_nominsize //used for report size calculations
 +
// )
 +
property widgetstate1: widgetstates1ty read fwidgetstate1;
 +
 +
* this set of states is needed because the max FPC set size is 32
 +
  thus "widgetstate1ty" can't fit all states
 +
 
 +
// TRUE if the widget is contained within another widget
 +
// ( tcomponent stuff )
 +
function hasparent: boolean; override;             
 +
 
 +
// returns the parent component if it's a widget or the grandparent otherwise
 +
function getparentcomponent: tcomponent; override;  // tcomponent
 +
 
 +
// TRUE if "awidget" is an ascendant or the widget or they are the same widget
 +
function checkdescendent(awidget: twidget): boolean;
 +
 +
// TRUE if app is running and the widget owns the caret or the caret widget
 +
function hascaret: boolean;
 +
 
 +
        // TRUE if "winid" allocated and not loading and not destroying,
 +
        // all widgets on a form have "winid" of this form ( a real window allocated by the OS )
 +
        // thus have this function TRUE
 +
function windowallocated: boolean;
 +
 
 +
// TRUE if presents a valid toplevelwindow with assigned "winid"
 +
function ownswindow: boolean;
 +
 
 +
// invalidated area of the widget, the origin is "clientpos" against the roor widget
 +
function updaterect: rectty;
 +
 
 +
// calls recursively "canclose" for all contained widgets ( the widget oneself excluded! ),
 +
// TRUE if none of the widgets return FALSE
 +
//
 +
// more specialized widgets may have "canclose" overridden
 +
// to perform more work than just this call recursion
 +
// ( not null or range check,.. )
 +
//
 +
// "onclosequery" must also pass the check if assigned, for the function to succeed
 +
function canclose(const newfocus: twidget = nil): boolean; virtual;
 +
 
 +
        // checks "canclose" first for focused widget of the window ( form,.. )
 +
        // if it is a descendant of the widget or the widget oneself,
 +
        // then continues with subwidgets of the widget;
 +
        // also - finishes editing ( snapshots "value" ) in the focused widget before checking
 +
function canparentclose(const newfocus: twidget): boolean; overload;
 +
 
 +
// the above function but with the preserved focus
 +
function canparentclose: boolean; overload;
 +
                  //newfocus = window.focusedwidget     
 +
 
 +
function canfocus: boolean; virtual;
 +
function setfocus(aactivate: boolean = true): boolean; virtual;//true if ok
 +
procedure nextfocus; //sets inputfocus to then next appropriate widget
 +
 
 +
function findtabfocus(const ataborder: integer): twidget;
 +
                      //nil if cannot focus
 +
 
 +
function firsttabfocus: twidget;
 +
function lasttabfocus: twidget;
 +
function nexttaborder(const down: boolean = false): twidget;
 +
 
 +
function focusback(const aactivate: boolean = true): boolean;
 +
                              //false if focus not changed
 +
 
 +
function parentcolor: colorty;
 +
function actualcolor: colorty; virtual;
 +
function actualopaquecolor: colorty;
 +
function backgroundcolor: colorty;
 +
function translatecolor(const acolor: colorty): colorty;
 +
 
 +
procedure widgetevent(const event: twidgetevent); virtual;
 +
 
 +
procedure sendwidgetevent(const event: twidgetevent);
 +
                              //event will be destroyed
 +
 
 +
procedure release; override;
 +
 
 +
function show(const modal: boolean = false; const transientfor: twindow = nil): modalresultty; virtual;
 +
 
 +
procedure hide;
 +
procedure activate(const abringtofront: boolean = true); virtual;
 +
                            //show and setfocus
 +
 
 +
procedure bringtofront;
 +
procedure sendtoback;
 +
procedure stackunder(const predecessor: twidget);
 +
 
 +
procedure paint(const canvas: tcanvas); virtual;
 +
procedure update; virtual;
 +
procedure scrollwidgets(const dist: pointty);
 +
 
 +
procedure scrollrect(const dist: pointty; const rect: rectty; scrollcaret: boolean);
 +
                            //origin = paintrect.pos
 +
 
 +
procedure scroll(const dist: pointty);
 +
                            //scrolls paintrect and widgets
 +
 
 +
procedure getcaret;
 +
procedure scrollcaret(const dist: pointty);
 +
function mousecaptured: boolean;
 +
procedure capturemouse(grab: boolean = true);
 +
procedure releasemouse;
 +
procedure capturekeyboard;
 +
procedure releasekeyboard;
 +
procedure synctofontheight; virtual;
 +
 
 +
procedure dragevent(var info: draginfoty); virtual;
 +
procedure dochildscaled(const sender: twidget); virtual;
 +
 
 +
procedure invalidatewidget;    //invalidates whole widget
 +
procedure invalidate;          //invalidates clientrect
 +
procedure invalidaterect(const rect: rectty; org: originty = org_client);
 +
procedure invalidateframestate;
 +
 
 +
procedure invalidateframestaterect(const rect: rectty;
 +
                                        const org: originty = org_client); 
 +
function hasoverlappingsiblings(arect: rectty): boolean; //origin = pos
 +
 
 +
function window: twindow;
 +
function rootwidget: twidget;
 +
 
 +
function parentofcontainer: twidget;
 +
            //parentwidget.parentwidget if parentwidget has not ws_iswidget,
 +
            //parentwidget otherwise
 +
 
 +
property parentwidget: twidget read fparentwidget write setparentwidget;
 +
function getrootwidgetpath: widgetarty; //root widget is last
 +
 
 +
// number of contained widgets ( the widget oneself excluded ! )
 +
function widgetcount: integer;
 +
 
 +
function parentwidgetindex: integer; //index in parentwidget.widgets, -1 if none
 +
property widgets[const index: integer]: twidget read getwidgets;
 +
function widgetatpos(var info: widgetatposinfoty): twidget; overload;
 +
function widgetatpos(const pos: pointty): twidget; overload;
 +
 
 +
function widgetatpos(const pos: pointty;
 +
                  const state: widgetstatesty): twidget; overload;
 +
 
 +
property taborderedwidgets: widgetarty read gettaborderedwidgets;
 +
 
 +
function findtagwidget(const atag: integer; const aclass: widgetclassty): twidget;
 +
              //returns first matching descendent
 +
 
 +
property container: twidget read getcontainer;
 +
function containeroffset: pointty;
 +
function childrencount: integer; virtual;
 +
property children[const index: integer]: twidget read getchildwidgets; default;
 +
 
 +
function childatpos(const pos: pointty;
 +
                  const clientorigin: boolean = true): twidget; virtual;
 +
 
 +
function getsortxchildren: widgetarty;
 +
function getsortychildren: widgetarty;
 +
property focusedchild: twidget read ffocusedchild;
 +
property focusedchildbefore: twidget read ffocusedchildbefore;
 +
 
 +
function mouseeventwidget(const info: mouseeventinfoty): twidget;
 +
 
 +
function checkdescendent(widget: twidget): boolean;
 +
                    //true if widget is descendent or self
 +
 
 +
function checkancestor(widget: twidget): boolean;
 +
                    //true if widget is ancestor or self
 +
 
 +
function containswidget(awidget: twidget): boolean;
 +
 
 +
procedure insertwidget(const awidget: twidget); overload;
 +
 
 +
procedure insertwidget(const awidget: twidget; const apos: pointty); overload; virtual;
 +
                //widget can be child
 +
 
 +
function iswidgetclick(const info: mouseeventinfoty; const caption: boolean = false): boolean;
 +
//true if eventtype = et_butonrelease, button is mb_left, clicked and pos in clientrect
 +
//or in frame.caption if caption = true, origin = pos
 +
 
 +
function isclick(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
 +
//true if eventtype = et_butonrelease, button is mb_left, clicked and pos in clientrect
 +
 
 +
function isdblclick(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
 +
//true if eventtype = et_butonpress, button is mb_left, pos in clientrect
 +
// and timedlay to last buttonpress is short
 +
 
 +
function isdblclicked(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
 +
//true if eventtype in [et_buttonpress,et_butonrelease], button is mb_left,
 +
// and timedlay to last same buttonevent is short
 +
 
 +
function isleftbuttondown(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
 +
//true if eventtype = et_butonpress, button is mb_left, pos in clientrect
 +
//origin = paintrect.pos
 +
 
 +
widgetrect: the widget on-screen area including its frame & frame caption
 +
 
 +
paintrect: the widget on-screen area except its frame & frame caption
 +
 
 +
clientrect: virtual area which
 +
- for non-scrolling widgets, equals to "paintrect", with its "pos:= (0,0)"
 +
- for scrolling widgets, may be bigger than "paintrect",
 +
  also may shift ( change its "pos" ) when scrolling
 +
 +
// the coord of outer top-left corner against the toplevel form = the window owner,
 +
// including the frame & frame caption
 +
function rootpos: pointty;
 +
 
 +
// the coord of the outer top-left corner against the screen ( the WM decorations aren't counted in )
 +
// includes the frame & frame caption
 +
property screenpos: pointty;
 +
 
 +
//  the coord of the outer top-left corner against the parent widget,
 +
// including the frame & frame caption
 +
property widgetrect: rectty;
 +
property pos: pointty; // =widgetrect.pos
 +
property size: sizety; // =widgetrect.size
 +
property left: integer; // =bounds_x
 +
property right: integer; //widgetrect.x + widgetrect.cx, sets cx;
 +
property top: integer;  // =bounds_y
 +
property bottom: integer; //widgetrect.y + widgetrect.cy, sets cy;
 +
property width: integer; // =bounds_cx
 +
property height: integer; // =bounds_cy
 +
function widgetsizerect: rectty;          //pos = nullpoint
 +
 
 +
    // the coord of the paint area ( paintrect ) against own outer top-left corner ( against "widgetrect=pos" )
 +
    //  except the frame & frame caption
 +
function paintrect: rectty;
 +
function paintpos: pointty;
 +
function paintsize: sizety;
 +
function innerpaintrect: rectty; // mainly equals to paintrect
 +
function clientwidgetrect: rectty; // mainly equals to paintrect
 +
function clientwidgetpos: pointty;
 +
function clippedpaintrect: rectty; // mainly equals to  but clipped by all parentpaintrects
 +
function innerwidgetrect: rectty;    // mainly equals to paintrect
 +
function innerclientwidgetpos: pointty;
 +
 
 +
    // the coord of the paint area ( paintrect ) against own outer top-left corner ( against "widgetrect=pos" )
 +
    //  except the frame caption
 +
function framerect: rectty; // =paintrect except the frame caption area
 +
function framepos: pointty;
 +
function framesize: sizety;
 +
 
 +
    // the coord of the client area ( clientrect )  against the paint area ( paintrect )
 +
    //  usually these areas match
 +
function clientrect: rectty;
 +
property clientsize: sizety;
 +
property clientwidth: integer;
 +
property clientheight: integer;
 +
property clientpos: pointty;
 +
 
 +
    // the coord of the paint area of the parent against the paint area of this widget
 +
function paintrectparent: rectty; //nullrect if parent = nil,
 +
 
 +
    // the coord of the client area of the parent against the paint area of this widget
 +
function clientrectparent: rectty; //nullrect if parent = nil,
 +
 
 +
// the coord of the inner area against the client area ( clientrect )
 +
function innerclientrect: rectty;  // mainly equals to clientrect
 +
function innerclientsize: sizety;
 +
function innerclientpos: pointty;
 +
 
 +
function framewidth: sizety;              //widgetrect.size - paintrect.size
 +
function clientframewidth: sizety;        //widgetrect.size - clientrect.size
 +
function innerclientframewidth: sizety;  //widgetrect.size - innerclientrect.size
 +
function innerframewidth: sizety;        //clientrect.size - innerclientrect.size 
 +
 
 +
    // the coord of the paint area against the widgetrect(pos) of the parent
 +
function paintparentpos: pointty;    //origin = parentwidget.pos
 +
 
 +
    // the coord of the client area against the widgetrect(pos) of the parent
 +
function clientparentpos: pointty;  //origin = parentwidget.pos
 +
 
 +
    // the coord of the widgetrect(pos) against the client area of parent
 +
property parentclientpos: pointty;
 +
 
 +
 
 +
function clientpostowidgetpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
 +
function widgetpostoclientpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
 +
function widgetpostopaintpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
 +
function paintpostowidgetpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
 +
procedure scale(const ascale: real); virtual;
 +
 
 +
 
 +
property minsize: sizety read fminsize write setminsize;
 +
property maxsize: sizety read fmaxsize write setmaxsize;
 +
function maxclientsize: sizety; virtual;
 +
 
 +
 
 +
property anchors: anchorsty read fanchors write setanchors default defaultanchors;
 +
property defaultfocuschild: twidget read getdefaultfocuschild write setdefaultfocuschild;
 +
 
 +
 
 +
procedure changeclientsize(const delta: sizety); //asynchronous
 +
 
 +
function getcanvas(aorigin: originty = org_client): tcanvas;
 +
 
 +
function showing: boolean;
 +
              //true if self and all ancestors visible and window allocated
 +
 
 +
function isenabled: boolean;
 +
              //true if self and all ancestors enabled
 +
 
 +
function active: boolean;
 +
function entered: boolean;
 +
 
 +
function activeentered: boolean;
 +
//true if entered and window is regularactivewindow or inactivated
 +
 
 +
function focused: boolean;
 +
function clicked: boolean;
 +
 
 +
function indexofwidget(const awidget: twidget): integer;
 +
 
 +
procedure changedirection(const avalue: graphicdirectionty;
 +
                                            var dest: graphicdirectionty); virtual;
 +
 
 +
// (re)arranges "awidgets" horizontally within the parent's client area
 +
// so that awidget[i] were placed next each other
 +
// at h-space dist[i], starting from "startx" with the right margin "endmargin";
 +
//
 +
// if the number of "dist" is fewer than the number of "awidgets" then the remaining h-spaces are taken
 +
// as the last "dist[i]" or "0" if none;
 +
// if the number of "dist" is more than the number of "awidgets" then the extra dist[i] are discarded
 +
//
 +
// non-zero "endmargin" causes one of awdidget[i] to h-resize to provide the margin :
 +
//  - if one or more of awidgets[i] have [an_left,an_right] set then the first of such is resized
 +
//    otherwise the last awidgets[i] is h-resized
 +
//
 +
procedure placexorder(
 +
const startx: integer;
 +
const dist: array of integer;
 +
                const awidgets: array of twidget;
 +
                const endmargin: integer = minint);
 +
 
 +
// (re)arranges "awidgets" vertically within the parent's client area
 +
// so that awidget[i] were placed upper/lower each other
 +
// at v-space dist[i], starting from "starty" with the bottom margin "endmargin";
 +
//
 +
// if the number of "dist" is fewer than the number of "awidgets" then the remaining v-spaces are taken
 +
// as the last "dist[i]" or "0" if none;
 +
// if the number of "dist" is more than the number of "awidgets" then the extra dist[i] are discarded
 +
//
 +
// non-zero "endmargin" causes one of awdidget[i] to v-resize to provide the margin :
 +
//  - if one or more of awidgets[i] have [an_top,an_bottom] set then the first of such is resized
 +
//    otherwise the last awidgets[i] is v-resized
 +
//
 +
procedure placeyorder(
 +
const starty: integer;
 +
const dist: array of integer;
 +
                const awidgets: array of twidget;
 +
                const endmargin: integer = minint);
 +
              //origin = clientpos, endmargin by size adjust of widgets
 +
              //with [an_top,an_bottom], minint -> no change
 +
 
 +
// if {mode <> wam_none} then (re)arranges "awidgets" horizontally  within the parent's client area so that
 +
// awidgets[0] stays on its place but awidgets[1..N] :
 +
// - if {mode = wam_end} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_left" set ) so that they right borders match the right border of awidgets[0]
 +
// - if {mode = wam_start} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_right" set ) so that they left borders match the left border of awidgets[0]
 +
// - if {mode = wam_center} then awidgets[i>=1] move so that they Y-axes match the Y-axe of awidgets[0]
 +
//
 +
// mainly applicable for v-stacked widgets since h-stacked may overlap after such alignment
 +
//
 +
        // returns the reference point ( the coord of awidgets[0] )
 +
function alignx(const mode: widgetalignmodety;
 +
                        const awidgets: array of twidget): integer;
 +
 
 +
 
 +
// if {mode <> wam_none} then (re)arranges "awidgets" vertically within the parent's client area so that
 +
// awidgets[0] stays on its place but awidgets[1..N] :
 +
// - if {mode = wam_end} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_top" set ) so that they bottom borders match the bottom border of awidgets[0]
 +
// - if {mode = wam_start} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_bottom" set ) so that they top borders match the top border of awidgets[0]
 +
// - if {mode = wam_center} then awidgets[i>=1] move so that they X-axes match the X-axe of awidgets[0]
 +
//
 +
// mainly applicable for h-stacked widgets since v-stacked may overlap after such alignment
 +
//
 +
        // returns the reference point ( the coord of awidgets[0] )
 +
function aligny(const mode: widgetalignmodety;
 +
                        const awidgets: array of twidget): integer;
 +
 
 +
function actualcursor: cursorshapety; virtual;
 +
 
 +
 
 +
Event handlers:
 +
 
 +
- onactivate
 +
 
 +
fires :
 +
 
 +
= on receiving input focus, just before "OnFocus"
 +
 +
= forms specific :
 +
* on 1-st display of the form after "OnLoaded" ( from "Loaded" procedure)
 +
* on switch back from another apllication/WM ( "oe_activate" event )
 +
* after closure of a descendant form
 +
* on minimizing/maximizing the form
 +
 
 +
- onchildscaled
 +
 
 +
fires :
 +
 
 +
= on child/children resizing due to font height change
 +
 
 +
= form widget: once "form.container" {scrolling widget} is loaded
 +
 
 +
- ondeactivate
 +
fires
 +
= form widget: when the form looses input focus
 +
= non-form widget: when the widget looses input focus
 +
 
 +
- ondefocus
 +
 
 +
fires
 +
= on disabling the widget
 +
 
 +
= form widget: if another form is focused
 +
= non-form widget: if another widget is focused
 +
 
 +
- onenter
 +
= fires on any way of taking parent-wide focus as soon as
 +
the parent stores the new child's order, before "OnActivate" & "OnFocus"
 +
 
 +
- onexit
 +
= fires last on parent-wide lossing focus, after "OnDefocus" & "OnDeactivate"
 +
= for top-level ( not in a container ) forms, doesn't fire
 +
 
 +
- onfocus
 +
fires
 +
= once the existing widget takes the focus
 +
= on showing the widget's form if the widget has the lowest "TabOrder"
 +
 
 +
- onfontheightdelta
 +
fires
 +
= if [ow_fontglyphheight OR ow_fontlineheight ] AND {the
 +
new font height differs from the previos one}
 +
= before the parent redraws this widget
 +
 
 +
- onpopup
 +
fires :
 +
= on calling a popup-menu ( with "RightClick" ), once the menu items of the current level are loaded
 +
( before building the submenus )
 +
 
 +
- onresize
 +
 
 +
= fires on creating/(changing size)/(min-max restoring) of widget,
 +
before actual redrawing
 +
 
 +
= rechecks if there's real work to do
 +
 
 +
- onshowhint
 +
= fires when a installed hint is activated or on "aplication.showint" called
 +
= since called last, allows to adjust the default behavior
 +
 
 +
- onbeforeupdateskin
 +
= fires in "updateskin" ( the widget is loaded etc ) before applying the skin
 +
 
 +
- onafterupdateskin
 +
= fires in "updateskin" ( the widget is loaded etc ) once the skin is applied
 +
 
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
=== TWidget stuff ===
 +
<pre>
 +
  Properties:   
 +
- name
 +
- anchors
 +
- bounds
 +
- color
 +
- enabled
 +
- visible
 +
- <face> : see {any face}
 +
- <frame> : see {any frame}
 +
    - hint
 +
    - helpcontext
 +
    - tag
 +
    - taborder
 +
    - cursor
 +
    - optionswidget
 +
    - optionsskin
 +
    - popupmenu
 +
   
 +
twidget's event handlers:
 +
   
 +
- on(de)activate
 +
- onbeforeupdateskin
 +
- onafterupdateskin
 +
- onchildscaled
 +
- onfontheightdelta
 +
- on(de)focus
 +
- onenter
 +
- onmove
 +
- onpopup
 +
- onresize
 +
- onshowhint
 +
     
 +
align_glue :
 +
  ( outer anchoring mode for widget group, in the align mode )
 +
- wam_none
 +
- wam_start
 +
- wan_center
 +
- wm_end
 +
 
 +
align_leader :
 +
the widget ( incl another spacer, splitter or layouter ) against which the alignment applies ( the reference widget )
 +
 
 +
align_mode :
 +
  ( inner anchoring mode within widget group, in the align mode )
 +
- wam_none
 +
- wam_start
 +
- wan_center
 +
- wm_end
 +
 
 +
// Place mode:
 +
 
 +
     
 +
place_mindist, place_maxdist:
 +
- in the place(ment) mode, limits distance between widgets
 +
  ( these distance once calculated also define side margins if applicable )
 +
 
 +
place_mode:
 +
  ( outer anchoring mode for widget group, in the place mode )
 +
- wam_none
 +
- wam_start
 +
- wan_center
 +
- wm_end
 +
 
 +
place_options:
 +
- plo_endmargin
 +
= to resize a widget so that it "eats" extra space if it occurs
 +
 +
* only applicable in the place mode, with a limiting value of "place_maxdist" and:
 +
 
 +
  1) {place_mode <> wam_none}
 +
or
 +
  2) {place_mode = wam_end} and {plo_propmargin in place_options}
 +
 
 +
For the exact look, see above
 +
 
 +
 
 +
- plo_propmargin
 +
= виджеты расставляются теснее так, чтобы образовались отступы перед и после,
 +
  причем расстояние между центрами виджетов было бы таким же,
 +
  как и растояние между серединами крайних виджетов и соотв. границами зоны расстановки
 +
 
 +
- plo_syncmaxautosize
 +
= see above
 +
 
 +
- plo_synccaptiondistx
 +
= see above
 +
 
 +
  * affects widgets with opposite cp_left/right set as well
 +
  * the minimal before-adjustment "captiondist" among all widgets limits "captiondist" for each of the widget
 +
              * don't set cfo_captiondistouter here !
 +
 
 +
- plo_synccaptiondisty
 +
= see above
 +
 
 +
  * affects also widgets with opposite cp_top/bottom set
 +
  * the minimal before-adjustment "captiondist" amongst all widgets limits "captiondist" for each of the widget
 +
 
 +
              ! here, don't set "cfo_captiondistouter" for affected widgets !
 +
 
 +
- plo_syncpaintwidth
 +
= see above
 +
 
 +
- plo_syncpaintheight
 +
= see above
 +
 
 +
- plo_scalesize
 +
= see above
 +
 
 +
 
 +
dist_left, dist_right, dist_top, dist_bottom :
 +
= margins between most outer edge the layouter and
 +
  the corresponding linked widget
 +
 
 +
* see "tspacer" for detail
 +
 
 +
linkleft,linkright,linktop,linkbottom : see "tspacer"
 +
 
 +
options:
 +
- spao_glueright, spao_gluebottom:
 +
= set the adjustment dependencies between the layouter and its link_* widgets
 +
 
 +
* see "tspacer" for more details
 +
 
 +
// which mode of widget placement to apply - see above
 +
optionslayout:
 +
- lao_alignx
 +
- lao_aligny
 +
- lao_placex
 +
- lao_placey
 +
- lao_scalewidth
 +
- lao_scaleheight
 +
- lao_scaleleft
 +
- lao_scaletop
 +
 +
* lao_place* & lao_align* can't be combined for one direction
 +
 
 +
optionsscale:
 +
 
 +
  * cause the layouter to provide full space for the widgets as long as they expand/shrink/move
 +
 
 +
- osc_expandx
 +
= allocates more h-space if needed
 +
 
 +
- osc_shrinkx
 +
= removes extra h-space if occurred
 +
 
 +
- osc_expandy
 +
= allocates more v-space if needed
 +
 
 +
- osc_shrinky
 +
= removes extra v-space if occurred
 +
 
 +
- osc_invisishrinkx
 +
= fully h-collapses the layouter if "visible=false" ( run-time only )
 +
 
 +
- osc_invisishrinky
 +
= fully v-collapses the layoter if "visible=false" ( run-time only )
 +
 
 +
optionsskin:
 +
= see <any widget>
 +
 
 +
 
 +
Methods:
 +
 
 +
constructor create(aowner: tcomponent); override;
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
=== Public stuff ===
 +
<pre>
 +
(f)window:
 +
the OS-allocated ( root = toplevel ) window common for all widgets of this window
 +
 +
* "widget.fwindow.fowner = widget.self" in case of the widget present the root "fwindow"
 +
  ( owns the window )
 +
 
 +
(f)rootpos:
 +
position of the widget in the coord of toplevel window not the nearest parent widget alone,
 +
calculated as sum of such positions ( fwidgetrect.pos ) starting from the toplevel through the
 +
                chain of all parents up to the current widget;
 +
"nullpoint" (0,0) for toplevel widgets ( window-owning forms,..)
 +
 
 +
screenpos:
 +
- coord aginst the top-left corner of screen
 +
- WM decoration & title aren't parts of the widget !
 +
 
 +
widgetrect:
 +
the widget on-screen area including its frame & frame caption
 +
 
 +
paintrect:
 +
the widget on-screen area except its frame & frame caption
 +
 
 +
clientrect:
 +
virtual area which
 +
- for non-scrolling widgets, equals to "paintrect", with its "pos:= (0,0)"
 +
- for scrolling widgets, may be bigger than "paintrect",
 +
  also may shift ( change its "pos" ) when scrolling
 +
 
 +
* "t*grid" aren't such scrollable widgets since their virtual height would be limited by
 +
  the X11 "+-32000" limitation,
 +
  so example of such widgets are tscrollbox, "tform.container" etc
 +
 
 +
framerect:
 +
the widget on-screen area except its frame caption but including inner & outer frame
 +
 
 +
****************
 +
 
 +
// releases all thread locks then post the event to the app event queue and
 +
// waits for the event handler finishes ( signalled by "sye_ok on a semaphore )
 +
// finally restores the locks
 +
    // true if the handler is not aborted
 +
function synchronizeevent(const aevent: tsynchronizeevent): boolean;
 +
 
 +
    // translates "point" coord against "source" widgetrect to "dest" widgetrect
 +
//
 +
//  * nil "source" = from screen coord
 +
//  * nil "dest" = to screen coord
 +
procedure translatewidgetpoint1(var point: pointty; const source,dest: twidget);
 +
 
 +
// the function-framed version of "translatewidgetpoint1"
 +
function translatewidgetpoint(const point: pointty; const source,dest: twidget): pointty;
 +
 
 +
// rect isntead of point,
 +
// if dest = nil then to screen
 +
    // if source = nil then against screen
 +
function translatewidgetrect(const rect: rectty; const source,dest: twidget): rectty;
 +
//-----------------
 +
    // translates "point" coord against "source" paintrect to "dest" paintrect
 +
//  * nil "source" = from screen coord
 +
//  * nil "dest" = to screen coord
 +
procedure translatepaintpoint1(var point: pointty; const source,dest: twidget);
 +
 
 +
// the function-framed version of "translatepaintpoint1"
 +
function translatepaintpoint(const point: pointty; const source,dest: twidget): pointty;
 +
 
 +
// rect isntead of point,
 +
// if dest = nil then to screen
 +
    // if source = nil then against screen
 +
function translatepaintrect(const rect: rectty;const source,dest: twidget): rectty;
 +
    //-----------------
 +
    // translates "point" coord against "source" clientrect to "dest" clienttrect
 +
//  * nil "source" = from screen coord
 +
//  * nil "dest" = to screen coord
 +
procedure translateclientpoint1(var point: pointty;
 +
                    const source,dest: twidget);
 +
 
 +
// the function-framed version of "translateclientpoint1"
 +
function translateclientpoint(const point: pointty; const source,dest: twidget): pointty;
 +
 
 +
// rect isntead of point,
 +
// if dest = nil then to screen
 +
    // if source = nil then against screen
 +
function translateclientrect(const rect: rectty; const source,dest: twidget): rectty;
 +
    //-----------------
 +
 
 +
// (re)sorts "awidgets" in order of increasing their "widgetrect.x" coords
 +
//  - if parent = nil then the coords are against individual parent of each of "awidgets"
 +
//  - if parent is supplied then the coords are against this parent
 +
procedure sortwidgetsxorder(var awidgets: widgetarty; const parent: twidget = nil);
 +
 
 +
// (re)sorts "awidgets" in order of increasing their "widgetrect.y" coords
 +
//  - if parent = nil then the coords are against individual parent of each of "awidgets"
 +
//  - if parent is supplied then the coords are against this parent
 +
procedure sortwidgetsyorder(var awidgets: widgetarty; const parent: twidget = nil);
 +
 
 +
// for each  of "widgets", calculates its autosized client area ( min size rect to fit the caption, etc )
 +
    //  - both hor & ver sizes of client area of each of "widgets" are adjusted to the max of the above calculated areas,
 +
//   as the result - client areas of all widgets become identically v+h sized
 +
    //
 +
    //  * right & bottom anchored margins of each widget are preserved
 +
procedure syncmaxautosize(const widgets: array of twidget);
 +
 
 +
// for each  of "widgets", width of client area of each of "widgets" is adjusted so that
 +
    // external ( by the outer border of frame ) widths of all widgets become identical
 +
    // to the external widht of the widest widget
 +
    //   
 +
    //  * if "awidth" >= 0 then no determining the widest widget is taken and
 +
    //    "awidth" is adjusted to instead, for all widgets
 +
    //  * right anchored margins of each widget are lost
 +
procedure syncminframewidth(const awidgets: array of twidget;
 +
                              const awidth: integer = -1);
 +
 
 +
// for each  of "widgets", height of client area of each of "widgets" is adjusted so that
 +
    // external ( by the outer border of frame ) heights of all widgets become identical
 +
    // to the external height of the highest widget
 +
    //   
 +
    //  * if "aheight" >= 0 then no determining the highest widget is taken and
 +
    //    "aheight" is adjusted to instead, for all widgets
 +
    //  * bottom anchored margins of each widget are lost
 +
procedure syncminframeheight(const awidgets: array of twidget; const aheight: integer = -1);
 +
</pre>
  
items[N]
+
== Projects using MSEgui ==
color
 
colorselect
 
datalist - ???
 
face - see <any face>
 
fontselect - see <any font>
 
frame - see <any frame>
 
linecolor
 
linecolorfix
 
linewidth
 
name
 
 
options
 
 
<pre/>
 
=== Report ===
 
  
==== TRepSpacer ====
+
* [[Projects using MSEgui]]
==== TRecordBand ====
 
==== TrepValueDisp ====
 
==== TRepPageNumdisp ====
 
==== TRepPrintDateDisp ====
 
==== TBandGroup ====
 
==== TTileArea ====
 
 
 
== Design ==
 
 
 
=== TGdbMi ===
 
=== TSyntaxEdit ===
 
=== TSyntaxPainter ===
 
 
 
== Comm ==
 
 
 
=== TCommPort ===
 
=== TAsciiCommPort ===
 
=== TAsciiProtPort ===
 
=== TCommSelector ===
 

Latest revision as of 00:07, 10 April 2021

English (en)

Widgets

TSimpleWidget

see also Reference:_MSEgui/TSimpleWidget

TMainMenuWidget

TSimpleWidget

TMseFormWidget

Use it in order to insert a tcustomform descendant into another widget at designtime. Does not try to load resources in "create".

        tmseform descendants ( MainForm, SimpleForm,.. )

	Client area of the form & parent of its widgets ( against which the widgets 
	are placed and colored ) is presented by the "container" property 
	not "container.frame.clientarea"

	CanClose is called :

		- on receiving "ek_close" by window
		- for modal window, on focus change

		- within parent window's "CanClose"	where all nested windows are  
		checked for OnCloseQuery & OnClose - if any sets "mr_none" then the parent window 
		can't close as well
			
		- from nested window's "CanParentClose"
		- from own "CanParentClose"

		- some componnets build oneself in own "Loaded" procedure :
			= widget grids
			= database access components
			= ...

	The "form.show" has parameter "transientfor".
	The window Z-order is above the "transientfor" window. The exact behaviour
	depends on the window manager.
        
        caption
		- run-time caption on the title bar

	color
		- color behind the client ( contaner ) area

	container
		- the real parent of form's widgets, <see "tformscrollbox">

	cursor
		- the mouse over cursor shape

	enabled - "false" disables all child widgets

	face
		<see "tfacecomp"> + some more options

	font
		<see "tfont">

	frame
		<see "tframecomp"> + some more options
		
	icon 
		<see "timage">

	mainmenu
		<see tmainmenu>

	name
		- name to refer when programming

	options:

		fo_main 
			- assigns this from as the aplication GUI-face & event receiver
			- causes the icon of this form to be icon of the application 

		fo_terminateonclose
			- causes the application to terminate once the form has closed ( doesn't depend on "fo_main" )


		fo_freeonclose
			- causes the form (even being modal) to release its memory on closure or OK-return from "CanClose"

		fo_defaultpos
			- lets the WM to position the form initially

		fo_screencentered
			- causes the form initially to show in center of the apllication work area

		fo_closeonesc
			- causes the form to close on "Esc" key pressed ( with MR_ESCAPE & "OnCloseQuery" firing )

		fo_cancelonesc
			- causes the form to close on "Esc" key pressed ( with MR_CANCEL & "OnCloseQuery" firing )

		fo_closeonenter
			- causes the form to close on "Enter" key pressed ( with MR_OK & "OnCloseQuery" firing )

		fo_closeonf10
			- causes the form to close on "F10" key pressed ( with MR_F10 & "OnCloseQuery" firing )

		fo_globalshortcuts
			- allows on-this-form "ao_globalshortcut" actions to trigger

			  Notes :
				= shortcuts for modal not "fo_localshortcut" forms are processed by app
				= shortcuts for "fo_globalshorcut" forms are processed by the owning window 

		fo_localshortcuts
			- disables triggering shortcuts of on-this-form actions

		fo_autoreadstat
			- for "cs_ismodule" forms, before "OnLoaded" fires, rereads all statvars from the bound stafile/memorystream

		fo_autowritestat
			- in "CanClose", after "OnClose" fires [ and before app termination for "fo_terminateonlose" form ], 
			rewrites all statvars to the stafile/memorystream
			- for datamodules, does this before "OnDestroy" fires

		fo_savepos
			- saves/restores Z-order, size & scree coordinates of the form 
			as soon as the stat data are ready

		fo_savestate
			- for top-level form, saves/restores "VSize", "Active" & "Visible" 
			as soon as the stat data are ready

	optionswidget
		<see "any widget">
	optionswindow
		<see "any window">
	popupmenu
		<see "tpopupmenu">
	stafile
		<see "tstafile">
	stavarname
	taborder
	tag

	visible - for a form, only affects its childs widgets

	Events:

		activate = to set focused & redraw the invalidated area

		oncreate
			- fires before "Loaded" procedure is called
			- fires after creating the widget & its subwidgets but before the final arrangement
			- forms arent' yet visible on return

		  Since "Loaded" procedure hasn't yet worked at this point then 
			database contents, values of widget grid's subwidgets 
			are invalid in this event ***

		onloaded
			- fires once "Loaded" procedure of owns & all form's widgets finishes
			- processed  after "OnCreate"
			- on finishing, forms aren't yet visible

		oneventloopstart ( main forms only )
			- only applicable to main forms
			- fires once all application GUI is built and shown 
			( and ready to user's interaction )
			
		onactivate 
			- see {any_widget.OnActivate}

		onenter
			= see {any_widget.OnEnter}

		onfocus
			- see {any_widget.OnFocus}
			

		onwindowactivechanged
			- fires on :
				= touching another window even on clicking in a behind-modal window ( or its title bar )
				= 1-st showing the window
				- reactivating the window

		onbeforepaint
			- fires at the very beginning of "paint", before drawing canvas

		onpaint
			- fires in "paint" procedure, between drawing canvas and contained widgets

		onafterpaint (doafterpaint)
			- fires just on return from "paint" procedure

        	onapplicationactivechanged 
			- fires :
				= if the application gets/looses input focus

		onasyncevent (doasyncevent)
			- fires on calling {this_form}.asyncevent(atag) from any place of the application
			once delivered by the app even queue

			 "atag" set by caller(s) helps to branch within "onasyncevent", to identify the caller, etc ***
			 generally, doesn't fire instantly because these events are delivered through the app event queue ***


		onchildmouseevent
			- fires on any mouse activity over its child widget(s) not the (containing) widget oneself

		      for forms, it even fires on enetering "container" therefore it appears as if to be the form itself ***

		onchildscaled
			- see {any_widget.OnChildScaled}

		onclientmouseevent
			- fires on any mouse activity over areas expecting user's mouse input (not titlebars/frames/...)

		onclose
			- fires in "CanClose" if "modalresult <> mr_none"

		onclosequery
			- fires in "CanClose" before "OnClose"
			- "mr_none" set on return prevents the window (and its parent) from closing 
			( "OnClose" is also bypassed )


		ondeactivate
			- see {any_widget.OnDeactivate}

		ondefocus
			- see {any_widget.OnDeFocus}
			
		ondestroy
			- fires on in-code calling "BeforeDestruction"

		ondestroyed
			- fires on return from the form's destructor ( when all resources are freed )

		onterminatequery
			- fires on an attempt to terminate the app
			- by setting "var terminate:= false", allows to cancel termination 

			 Termination by debugger/OS facilities can't be blocked this way ( win32 )***

		onterminated
			- fires for not-yet-destroyed forms, once the app event loop finishes 
			- may be caused by any closure of the main app form 
			( app termination, WM/OS facilities, )


		onwindowdestroyed
			- fires once a descendant window is destroyed 
			( for a main form, when a modal simple form is closed by any way,.. )

		onevent
			- fires on receiving an event 
				= for simple forms, it's only "ek_loaded"

			There can be more if the form is connected to object_event sending
			components or if the application uses object events, for example by calling
			tguicomponent.postcomponentevent. ****

		onexit
			- see {any_widget.OnExit}

		onfocusedwidgetchanged
			- for a "prev-new" parent-wide focused wigdets pair, fires once installing new focus has finished, 
			after "OnFocus"
			- resends for all contained widgets
			- doesn't fire if the "prev-new" pair don't really change

		onfontheightdelta
			- see {any_widget.OnFontHeightDelta}

		onhide
			- fires at beginnig of own/parent's 
				= hide
				= hidden
				= destroying
				= setting "visible:= false"
				= closing the window ( receiving event "ek_close",.. )
				= calling "window.close" 
				
		onidle
			- fires everytime when the app GUI event queue gets empty
			- to stop calling for a while, set "again" parameter to "false" (the initial value );
			
			 DON'T DO ANYTHING AFFECTING THE APP EVENT QUEUE ( MODAL WINDOWS, "ShowMessage", Sleep(N),... ) IN THIS HANDLER. 
				MODAL WINDOWS CAUSE RECURSION ! 
			
			A code fragment:

				again:= i < 5;
				if not again then exit;

		onkeydown
			- fires on pressing down a keyboard key over the client area when none of child widgets is focused

		onkeyup
			- fires on releasing a keyboard key over the client area when none of child widgets is focused

		onmouseevent
			- fires on any mouse activity over the client area

		onmove
			- see {any_window.OnMove}

		onpopup
			- see {any_widget.OnPopup}

		onresize
			- see {any_widget.OnResize}

		onshortcut
			- fires before built-in shorcut processing
			- "info.eventstate=es_processed" set in "OnShortcut" prevents 
			the event from further auto-processing

			The app 
				- recognizes & takes registered shortcuts from app event queue
				- passes the shocrcut event to each of its windows until the event 
				is processed otherwise processes it by oneself 
			

		onshow
			- fires if the widget is visible:
				= on calling "Show" method
				= on return from "Loaded" procedure
				= on showing the parent widget
			- since called at end, allows to adjust the default behavior

		onshowhint
			- see {any_widget.OnShowHint}

		onstatbeforeread 
			- fires before loading statvars  from the disk file

		onstatafterread
			- fires once statvars are loaded from the disk file

		onstatupdate 
			- fires at 1-st stage before updating GUI "state/pos" for read statvars
			or 
			- fires at pre-last stage before saving GUI "state/pos"

		onstatread 
			- fires at 2-nd stage before updating GUI "state/pos" for read statvars

		onstatwrite
			- fires at last stage before saving GUI "state/pos"

		pon stat reading, non-minimized visible windows are shown, 
		the active window is activated 

TDockFormWidget

TPaintbox

How to draw line (or circle) on tpaintbox? In event onpaint:

 
 procedure tmainfo.paintboxonpaint(const sender: twidget; const canvas: tcanvas); 
 begin 
  with sender,canvas do begin 
   drawline(nullpoint,pointty(size),cl_yellow);  
   //diagonal line across widget 
   drawellipse(makerect(makepoint(bounds_cx div 2,bounds_cy div 2), size),cl_red); 
   //circle (or ellipse) centered in widget                             
  end; 
 end;

Makepoint and makerect are in msegraphutils.

TEventWidget

A widget which publishes all possible events of a twidget. Normally it is better to implement your own specialized descendant of an existing widget instead to use teventwidget.

TButton

  • A rectangular clickable area that can show text/bitmap.

- Main properties:

Caption: read/write the text that appear on top of it.
onexecute: read/write the address of a procedure (event handler) to be executed when clicked.

TStockGlyphButton

TRichButton

TLabel

  • Draws a piece of text on the given surface (canvas: screen/printer/bitmap).

- Main properties:

Caption: read/write the piece of text.

See also TLabel

TGroupBox

TStepBox

TStringDisp

  • A read only version of TStringEdit, difference from TLabel: has a frame around it.

-Main properties:

Value: read/write the text that are showed.
Caption: A label normally describing the purpose or meaning of the presented text, it can be positioned around the frame.

TByteStringDisp

TIntegerDisp

TRealDisp

TDateTimeDisp

TBooleanDisp

TToolBar

TDrawGrid

TStringGrid

TTabBar

TTabPage

TTabWidget

TDockHandle

TDockPanel

TSpliter

	       A widget very similar to "tspacer" but :
		- designed to rearrange areas occupied by adjacent widgets
		- a linked widget may only enlarge by "eating" the opposite one, 
		so the summary area of both widgets don't change
		- has GUI look ( hatched grip, color etc) switched on by default
		- facilitates run-time repositioning oneself and linked widgets
		- linked widgets may even be other splitters, spacers (with their linked widgets ),..
	
        Properties:

	- color
		= see {any_widget.color}

	- cursor
		= see {any_widget.cursor}

	- enabled
		= "false" stops user interaction

	- face
		= see {any_face}

	- frame
		= see {any_frame}

	- colorgrip
		= color of grip hatching

	- grip
		= defines hatching pattern of the grip

			* stb_dens(N) : the pattern is of rhombuses, the painted rhombs occupy "N" persents of the grip

			* stb_block(N) : the pattern is of squares, painted & unpainted squares are equally sized and 
			both have "N" pixels sides
			
			* stb_hatchup(N) : the pattern is of right-tilted lines of 1 pixel width,
			each "N"-th pixel forms these lines

			* stb_hatchdown(N) : the pattern is of left-tilted lines of 1 pixel width,
			each "N"-th pixel forms these lines

			* stb_crosshatch(N) : the pattern is of crossing (left & right) tilted lines of 1 pixel width,
			each "N"-th pixel forms these lines


	- linkbottom/linkleft/linkright/linktop 
		= see {tspacer.*}

	- options

		= spo_hmove
			* "true" allows the spliter to move horizontally

		= spo_hprop
			* "true" : keep the left position proportional ( on the ratio of creation time ) 
			to weigth of the client area of parent

		= spo_hsizeprop
			* "true" : keep width of the spacer proportional ( on the ratio of creation time ) 
			to weigth of the client area of parent
			* the width stops shrinking on one set in design time

		= spo_vmove
			* "true" allows the spliter to move vertically

		= spo_vprop
			* "true" : keep the top position proportional ( on the ratio of creation time ) 
			to height of the client area of parent

		= spo_vsizeprop
			* "true" : keep height of the spacer proportional ( on the ratio of creation time ) 
			to height of the client area of parent
			* the height stops shrinking on one set in design time

		= spo_dockleft
			* causes the "linkleft" widget to dock to the left border of splitter
			* make sence only if linkleft "widget.bounds_x" less than "splitter.bounds_x"

		= spo_docktop
			* causes the "linktop" widget to dock to the top border of splitter
			* make sence only if linktop "widget.bounds_y" less than "splitter.bounds_y"

		= spo_dockright
			* causes the "linkright" widget to dock to the right border of splitter
			* make sence only if linkright "widget.(bounds_x+bounds_cx)" more than "splitter.(bounds_x+bounds_cx)"

		= spo_dockbottom
			* causes the "linkbottom" widget to dock to the bottom border of splitter
			* make sence only if linkbottom "widget.(bounds_y+bounds_cy)" more than "splitter.(bounds_y+bounds_cy)"

		!!! Two special cases :

		1. (spo_dockleft = spo_dockright = TRUE) && (linkleft = linkright = the_same_widget) : 
			causes the "linkleft" widget to adjust to h-positiion & width of the splitter, 
			it's even possible that the widget doesn't touch the splitter

			(spo_docktop = spo_dockbottom = TRUE) && (linktop = linkbottom = the_same_widget) : 
			causes the "linktop" widget to adjust to v-position & height of the splitter, 

			It's even possible in these cases that the widget doesn't touch the splitter

	- optionsscale
		= see {tscalingwidget.optionsscale}

	- optionswidget
		= see {anywidget.optionswidget}

	- onactivate, onchildscaled, ondeactivate, ondefocus, onenter, onexit, onfocus,
	  onfontheightdelta, onmove, onpopup, onresize, onshowhint
		= see "tspacer"

	- onupdatelayout
		fires :
		
		= on creating the splitter
		= on any reposition of the linked widgets 
		( due to moving the splitter, resizing the parent,.. )

TSpacer

* a regular widget which creates a kind of positional link between surrounding widgets
* designed to maintain distances between widgets
* may have GUI look, caption etc switched off by default
* resizing a spacer repositions its linked widgets

Properties:

- anchors = see {any_widget.anchors}

- bounds = see {any_widget.bounds}

- color = see {any_widget.color}

- enabled = "false" turns color of the caption to gray

- visible = "true" allows displayable settings (caption text, face, frame etc) to take effect in run-time as well

- <face> = see {any face}

- <frame> = see {any frame}

- linkbottom = widget linked down to most outer edge (incl. frame[.caption]) of the spacer - linkleft = widget linked left to most outer edge of the spacer - linkright = widget linked right to most outer edge of the spacer - linktop = widget linked up to most outer edge of the spacer

- dist_bottom, dist_left, dist_right, dist_top : = margins between most outer edge the spacer and the corresponding linked widget

- options :

= spao_glueright

- if "false"

h-repositioning or h-resizing the linkleft widget shifts the whole linked construction, it becomes the only way to h-shift

if {an_right IN linkright_widget.anchors} then the spacer may be right-resized with auto h-resizing the linkright widget so that the right margin of that widget is kept

if NOT {an_right IN linkright_widget.anchors} then the spacer may be right-resized with auto h-shifting the linkright widget so that width of that widget is kept

- if "true"

h-repositioning or h-resizing the linkright widget shifts the whole linked construction, it becomes the only way to h-shift

if {an_left IN linkleft_widget.anchors} then the spacer may be h-resized with auto h-resizing the linkleft widget so that the left margin of that widget is kept

if NOT {an_left IN linkleft_widget.anchors} then the spacer may be h-resized with auto h-shifting the linkleft widget so that width of that widget is kept

= spao_gluebottom

- if "false"

v-repositioning or v-resizing the linktop widget shifts the whole linked construction, it becomes the only way to v-shift

if {an_bottom IN linkbottom_widget.anchors} then the spacer may be v-resized with auto v-resizing the linkbottom widget so that the bottom margin of that widget is kept

if NOT {an_bottom IN linkbottom_widget.anchors} then the spacer may be v-resized with auto v-shifting the linkbottom widget so that height of that widget is kept

- if "true"

v-repositioning or v-resizing the linkbottom widget shifts the whole linked construction, it becomes the only way to v-shift

if {an_top IN linktop_widget.anchors} then the spacer may be v-resized with auto v-resizing the linktop widget so that the top margin of that widget is kept

if NOT {an_top IN linktop_widget.anchors} then the spacer may be v-resized with auto v-shifting the linktop widget so that height of that widget is kept

- optionsscale = see {tscalingwidget.optionsscale}

- optionswidget = see {anywidget.optionswidget}

- onactivate, onchildscaled, ondeactivate, ondefocus, onenter, onexit, onfocus, onfontheightdelta, onpopup, onresize, onshowhint = see {any_widget.*}

- onmove = see {any_window.OnMove}

any "link*" option set disables the spacer to reposition solely, repositioning is only controlled by a "glued" widget since then

TLayouter

  • a tspacer descendant designed to (auto)resize or/and move its contained widgets acc to some size/positon dependencies
  • may have GUI look, frame caption etc switched off by default
  • layouters may be nested to achieve complex layouts

Each layout change/assignment is divided into performing 3 consequent stages :

Stage 1

Widgets auto resized using the following options:

- if {lao_placex OR lao_placey} :

		= if {plo_scalesize in optionslayout}  then
			* widgets with "osk_nopropwith" unset in their "optionsskin" are h-scaled 
		  	  in the proportion of change of tlayouter's clientwidth
			* widgets with "osk_nopropheight" unset in their "optionsskin" are v-scaled 
		  	  in the proportion  of change of tlayouter's clientheight

			For h-resized layouter, the effect looks like :

		 	 |--Widget__1---Widget__2--|		=> the initial look

		  	 |--Widget_1--Widget_2--|			=> the layouter gets narrower

		  	 |---Widget___1---Widget___2---|	=> the layouter gets wider

			*** both widget sizes & margins are affected ***
			*** Widget_N may generally situate on different y-levels *** 
		  	
	otherwise :

		= if lao_scalewidth in optionslayout :
			* widgets with "osk_nopropwith" unset in their "optionsskin" enters in the mode 
		 	  ( not applied until the layouter resizes! ) when they are h-scaled in the proportion 
		 	  as far as clientwidth of the tlayouter changes, then stages 2 & 3 are reapplied

			For h-resized layouter, the effect looks like :

			  |--Single____widget????|		=> the initial look

			  |--Single__widget???|			=> the layouter gets narrower

			  |--Single_______widget?????|	=> the layouter gets wider

			* also, if {lao_scaleleft in optionslayout} then left margins of the widgets 
			  with unset "optionsskin.osk_nopropleft" resize too otherwise retain

		= if lao_scaleheight in optionslayout :
			* widgets with "osk_nopropheight" unset in their "optionsskin" enters in the mode 
		 	  ( not applied until the layouter resizes! ) when they are v-scaled in the proportion 
		  	  as far as clientheight of the tlayouter changes, then stages 2 & 3 are reapplied

			* also, if {lao_scaletop in optionslayout} then top margins of the widgets 
			  with unset "optionsskin.osk_noproptop" resize too otherwise retain

			*** only widget sizes & margins not distances between them are affected ***

Stage 2

Widgets may be auto resized in 5 consequent steps using the following options:


1. if plo_syncmaxautosize in place_options :
   = all widgets are autosized then their client areas are synchronised to the
     clientareas of the highest and the widest of the widget
   * calls "msegui.syncmaxautosize"

2. if plo_syncpaintwidth in place_options :
   = the paintwidths of all widgets are synchronized to the widget with the
     widest outer frame width ( ex. width of "frame.caption" )
   * mainly makes sense if "lao_alignx" set and {align_glue = wam_start or wam_end}
     ( see below ) when the widgets will be adjusted in order to fit into the
     inner client width of tlayouter:

                                   x-align level           
                                         V                 
                        +----------------------------------+
                        | Widget_1 the_widest_frame_caption|
                        | Widget_2 frame_caption2          |
                        | Widget_N wider_frame_captionN    |
                        +----------------------------------+

   here, the effect is shown for "cp_right" frame captions
     // otherwise syncronizes to the outer ( of the frame except its caption ) width 
     // of the Z-top widget
   * calls "msegui.syncpaintwidth"
   * paintwidth is the outer width

3. if plo_syncpaintheight in place_options :
   = the paintheights of all widgets are synchronized to the widget with the
     highest outer frame width ( ex. width of "frame.caption" ).
   * mainly makes sense if lao_aligny set and {align_glue = wam_start or wam_end}
     ( see below ) the widgets will be adjusted in order to fit into the inner
     client height of tlayouter :

                        +------------------------------+
                        | The_                         |
                        | tallest_            taller_  |
                        | frame_    frame_    frame_   |
                        | caption   caption2  captionN |  
                        |                              |
                        | Widget1   Widget_2  Widget_N |<== y-align level 
                        +------------------------------+     		

  here, the effect is shown for "cp_topleft" frame captions
    // otherwise syncronizes to the outer ( of the frame except its caption ) 
    // height of the Z-top widget
  * calls "msegui.syncpaintheight"
 
4. plo_synccaptiondistx in place_options :
   = causes all widgets to have the widest common room for their cp_(left/right)* frame captions
   * calls "msegui.synccaptiondistx"
 
5. plo_synccaptiondisty in place_options :
   = causes all widgets to have the highest common room for their cp_(top/bottom)* frame captions
   * calls "msegui.synccaptiondisty"

Stage 3

The widgets may be (re)arranged within the layouter.

There're 2 modes of such (re)arrangement which can be partially (orthogonally)
combined (see later):

1) The place(ment) mode ( lao_place* in optionslayout ) :

- widgets are placed at some distances between each other, possibly with some
  margins, rooms of invisible widgets ( having visible=false) are also allocated
  unless "plo_noinvisible in place_options"

  * the widgets are placed in the order of decreasing their "widgetrect.x"
	coordinates before alignment
  
  * the inter-widget distances and the side margins ( if apllied ) in both
	dimentions are identical and limited between "place_mindist" and
	"place_maxdist"
  
  = if {lao_placex in optionslayout} and {place_mode <> wam_none} then the
	following relevant settings apply:
  
	* non-limiting value of "place_maxdist" :
	
		# |Widget_1------Widget_2------Widget_3| 
	
	* non-limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {plo_propmargin in place_options} :
	
		# |---Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3---|
		
	* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_start} :
	
		# |Widget_1----Widget_2----Widget_3????|
		
	* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_start} and
	  {plo_propmargin in place_options} :
	
		# |---Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3???|
		
	* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_end} :
	
		# |??????Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3|
		
	* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_end} and
	  {plo_propmargin in place_options} :
	
		# |???Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3---|
		
	* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_center} :
	
		# |???Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3???|
		
	* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {plo_endmargin in place_options} :
	
		# |Widget_1----Widget_2----Widget_____3|, or
		
		# |Widget_1----Widget_____2----Widget_3|, or
		
		# |Widget_____1----Widget_2----Widget_3|, here, the most left amongst
		widgets having both [an_left,an_right] set is expanded otherwise the most
		right widget ( Widget_3 in the example )
		
	* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_end} and
	  {plo_propmargin in place_options} and {plo_endmargin in place_options} :
	  
		# |--Widget_1--Widget_____2--Widget_3--|,
		  
	The Legend:
	===========
	limiting value of "place_maxdist" : such value which produce some visual
	effect on the layouter
	
	  "----" :           distance ( = number of minuses, limited by place_maxdis )
	  "????" :           some remaining space ( = number of questmarks )
	  "Widget_1" :       widget of the original size
	  "Widget__..__1" : (auto)resized widget
  
  = if {lao_placey in optionslayout} and {place_mode <> wam_none} then the things
	are handled in the same manner as with "lao_placex" but for the vertical
	"top2bottom" direction of placement instead of the horizontal "left2right" one.

2) the align(ment) mode ( optionslayout.lao_align* ) :

- widgets are gathered into a visual group to a dedicated "leader" widget of
  the layout ( set by "align_leader" and defaults to the lowest in
  Z-Order = twidget.widgets[0] ) the leader stays in place while the others :

  = if lao_alignx in optionslayout ( the hor alignment mode ):
	  * if align_mode = wam_start :
		snap their left borders to the left border of leader
	  * else if align_mode = wam_end :
		snap their right borders to the right border of leader
	  * else if align_mode = wam_center :
		snap their v-axes to the v-axis of leader after that,
  = if lao_aligny in optionslayout ( the vert alignment mode ):
	  * if align_mode = wam_start :
		snap their top borders to the top border of leader
	  * else if align_mode = wam_end :
		snap their bottom borders to the bottom border of leader
	  * else if align_mode = wam_center :
		snap their h-axes to the h-axis of leader

- after that, the whole widget group can be aligned within the layouter:

  = if align_glue =  wam_start
	  * if lao_alignx in optionslayout:
		the left extent of group snaps to the left border of layouter
	  * if lao_aligny in optionslayout:
		the top extent of group snaps to the top border of layouter
  = else if align_glue = wam_end
	  * if lao_alignx in optionslayout:
		the right extent of group snaps to the right border of layouter
	  * if lao_aligny in optionslayout:
		the bottom extent of group snaps to the bottom border of layouter
  = else if align_glue =  wam_center
	  * if lao_alignx in optionslayout:
		the v-axis of group snaps to the v-axis of layouter
	  * if lao_aligny in optionslayout:
		the h-axis of group snaps to the h-axis of layouter

Mutually exclusive settings:
* only one of "align_mode" can be choosen
* only one of  "glue_mode" can be choosen
* "optionslayout.lao_alignx" & 	"optionslayout.lao_placex"
* "optionslayout.lao_aligny" & 	"optionslayout.lao_placey"

V-alignment ( optionslayout.lao_aligny ) may be combined with h-placement
( optionslayout.lao_placex ), and h-alignment ( optionslayout.lao_alignx ) may
be combined with v-placement ( optionslayout.lao_placey )

NOTE:
  The effects of the above described { resizing / placement / alignment } are
  irreversible. So, the only way to revert is to set "wan_none" then to revert
  manually.

TListView

TImage

<any image>

	*** Note that switch to the monochrome mode is irerreversible ! ***

	alignment:

		By default, images are top-left aligned, with the original size preserved.

		al_xcentered = centers the image horizontally
		al_ycentered = centers the image vertically

		al_right = docks the image to the right border of placeholder
		al_bottom = docks the image to the bottom border of placeholder

		al_grayed = fills non-transparent areas with the selected color

		al_stretchx = adjusts size so that to fill the placeholder in width
		al_stretchy = adjusts size so that to fill the placeholder in height
		al_fit = adjusts size so that to fill the placeholder in both width & height

		al_tiled = spawns the image & tile the whole  placeholder with the copies 

		Interpolation mode while stretching

			al_intpol =	antialiases as far as the size changes 
						(the only working in Linux)
			al_or = interpolation pixel operation is "or" -> 1's are extended
			al_and = interpolation pixel operation is "and" -> 0's are extended
		( al_or and al_and only on win32, mainly useful for stretching of monochrome bitmaps) :

	colorbackground = color of image transparent ( masked ) areas in monochrome 
						non-masked mode 
	colorforeground = color of non-transparent areas in monochrome mode  

	options:

		bmo_monochrome = fills non-transparent areas with "colorforeground", 
						also, in non-masked mode, fills transparent areas 
						with "colorbackground"

		bmo_masked = activates built-in image transparency {it "hides" transparent (masked) areas}
		bmo_colormask = applies faded edge transparency on the color masked areas in the image

	transparency = makes the image transparent as long as enlights areas behind 
					the image with the selected color

	transparentcolor = for a non-masked image, assigns a color indicate transparency areas
					( on matching areas, the image will be seen through )

TDial

TChart

There are demos here:

https://github.com/mse-org/mseuniverse/tree/master/attic/msedocumenting/mse/trunk/help/tutorials/widgets/charts

TChartRecorder

TPolygon

TPickWidget

TOpenglWidget

Edit

TStringEdit

TMemoEdit

THexStringEdit

TDropdownListEdit

A tstringedit with a dropdownlist to choose text values. Important dropdown.options members:
- deo_autodropdown dropdown on keypress
- deo_selectonly don't allow entering arbitrary text.
- deo_forceselect don't allow entering empty text.

THistoryEdit

A tstringedit which shows the previously entered values in a dropdownlist for selection.

TIntegerEdit

TKeyStringEdit

Maps string to string.

TEnumEdit

Maps integer to string, zero based and sequencial (first item 0, next 1, ...).

TEnumTypeEdit

A TEnumEdit which maps Pascal enums to their names. Use OnInit event to store the typeinfo pointer of the enum type into sender.typeinfopo.

 
procedure tmainfo.enumtypeeditinit(const sender: tenumtypeedit);
begin
  sender.typeinfopo := PTypeInfo(TypeInfo(TMyEnumeratedType));
end;

TSelector

TSelector is the most specialized widget of the dropdown editwidget group, it is based on tenumedit (tenumedit maps an integer to a string) and uses for the dropdownlist a second map which must be created on the fly in ongetdropdowninfo. An example is tcommselector where the enumedit maps commnrty to commname and the dropdownlist shows the available RS232 ports only.

TRealEdit

TRealSpinEdit

TDateTimeEdit

TCalendarDateTimeEdit

TEdit

MSEgui counterpart of Delphi TEdit. You will never use it.

TWidgetGrid

TItemEdit

TDropDownItemEdit

A tstringedit with a dropdownlist to choose text values. Important dropdown.options members:
- deo_autodropdown dropdown on keypress
- deo_selectonly don't allow entering arbitrary text.
- deo_forceselect don't allow entering empty text.

TMBDropDownItemEdit

TTreeItemEdit

TRecordFieldEdit

Used in twidgetgrid in order to edit fields of a ttreeitemedit. Example is MSEide projecttreeform.pas.

TDialogStringEdit

A tstringedit with an ellipse button. Use "onexecute" to show the dialog.

TPointerEdit

TSlider

TProgressBar

TBooleanEdit

TBooleanEditRadio

TDataButton

A button with an integer value. Clicking increments the value until "max", then it restarts with "min". Can be inserted into a twidgetgrid. The current value selects the showed image and face by the items of "imagenums" and "valuefaces".

TStockGlyphDataButton

TDataIcon

Shows an imagelist item by lookup from "value" to "imagenums". Clicking increments value until "max" then it restarts with "min". Can be inserted into a twidgetgrid.

TTextEdit

Only useful if inserted into a twidgetgrid, builds a text editor, used in MSEide source editor.

TDataImage

A pixmap display widget which can be inserted into twidgetgrid.

TTerminal

Only useful if inserted into a twidgetgrid, builds a very simple terminal emulator. Used in MSEide target console.

NoGui

TAction

	Shortcut processing order :

	- the smallest piece of processing is "doshortcut" procedure which 
	is called until processed:
		= starting from the sender up to the toplevel widget
		= then by all child widgets with non-set "ow_noparentshortcut" 
		= then, if "ow_nochildshortcut" isn't set, by the parent widget
		= then by the widget oneself
	
	- "doshortcut" is checked in the following order:
		= starting from form's main menu
		= then from the owning window ( the widget oneself ) 
		= then from the application


		*** A shortcut is bound to a widget by :
			- placing an action component on the widget ***
			- direct assigning the shortcut to the widget (menus,..) 
	---------------------------

		caption, color, colorglyph, helpcontext, hint, imagecheckedoffset,
		imagelist <see "timagelist">, imagenr, imagenrdisabled

			- sets look of "clients" (buttons, menu/toolbar items,..), unless 
			these clients have "state.as_local*" set :

		*** For meaning of these options, see help on the "client" widgets ***

	group
		- default value for one-named property of the bound widgets
		( menu items,... )

	options :
		ao_updateonidle
			- runs this action in cycle, waiting for no gui events everytime

		ao_globalshortcut 
			- allows the action to trigger on a non-main form
			  (the shortcut is triggered whatever form of the applicatin it was pressed on, 
			  otherwise only when the form where the aption is placed on is focused )

		ao_nocandefocus 
			- causes the action not to call "CanDefocus" for focused edit widget of active form
			  before executing own code
			  ( it helps to avoid the effect of cancelling changes in these widgets 
			  on activating the bound shortcut )

	shortcut
		- keyboard combination triggering the action

	shortcut
		- alternative "shortcut" and handled identically

	state :

		as_disabled
			- prevents the action from triggering, also puts the bound widgets to "disabled" look

		as_invisible
			- in run-time, hides the bound widget, still reacting on the shortcut or direct call

		as_checked
			- selects the bound menu item if it has "mao_checkbox" option set

		as_default
		as_local*

	statfile	
		<see "tstatfile">

	stavarname

	
	tagaction
	onasyncevent
	onchange
	onexecute
	onupdate

TActivator

TCustomLookupbuffer

	-	provides a group of parallel arrays of float(=datetime), integer and widestring types,
		and facilities to :
			= search in any array
			= on found position, quickly obtain corresponding value in another array
	-	for each type, several arrays  may be kept
	- 	each array is integer-indexed, even string ones ( case[in]sensitive )
	-	uses two way of accessing arrays data, through :
			= physic : array storage index ( row number ) directly
			= logical : the integer index ( see above ):
				first, physic row number is known for the logical index then the data 
				are accessed with the found number

			*** logical index values are built automatically based on array values, 
			on updating its data ***
	- dont' have interface to load data ( see its descendants for that )
	
	fieldcountfloat - number of float arrays
	fieldcountinteger - number of integer arrays
	fieldcounttext - number of widestring arrays

	Event handlers:
		- onchange

	Public interface:

   		procedure beginupdate; - marks beginning of "update"
   		procedure endupdate; - if all "update" finished, fires "onchange" event
	 	procedure clearbuffer; - clears all arrays then fires "onchange"

   		procedure checkbuffer; 
   			- [re]loads the arrays with most actual data
   			- just a stub here since doesn't have a data source

   		function find(const fieldno: integer; const avalue: integer/realty/msestring;
         	out aindex: integer; const filter: lbfiltereventty = nil): boolean;
			- applies external filtering ("filter" procedure) then incrementally searches integer/realty(datetime) array "fieldno" 
			for value "avalue" starting from logical index "aindex", returns "true" and the updated logical index 
			if found else next bigger; 

   		function find(const fieldno: integer; const avalue: msestring;
                 out aindex: integer;
                 const caseinsensitive: boolean;
                 const filter: lbfiltereventty = nil): boolean; overload;
			- applies external filtering ("filter" procedure) then incrementally searches widestring array "fieldno" for value "avalue", 
			in "caseinsensitive" manner, starting from logical index "aindex", returns "true" and the updated logical index 
			if found else next bigger;

   		function findphys(const fieldno: integer; const avalue: integer;
         	out aindex: integer; const filter: lbfiltereventty = nil): boolean; overload;
			- applies external filtering ("filter" procedure) then incrementally searches integer/realty(datetime) array "fieldno" 
			for value "avalue" starting from row number "aindex", returns "true" and the updated row number 
			if found else next bigger; 

		function findphys(const fieldno: integer; const avalue: msestring;  out aindex: integer; const caseinsensitive: boolean;
                 const filter: lbfiltereventty = nil): boolean; overload;
			- applies external filtering ("filter" procedure) then incrementally searches widestring array "fieldno" for value "avalue", 
			in "caseinsensitive" manner, starting from row number "aindex", returns "true" and the updated row number  
			if found else next bigger;

			The external filtering ("filter") procedure takes the arguments of the caller 
			togehther with physical row number found in the caller which allows 
			to check several values at once for that number, within the filter
			
		function integervaluephys(const fieldno,aindex: integer): integer;
			-  returns value of integer array "fieldno" at row number "aindex" 
              
		function integervaluelog(const fieldno,aindex: integer): integer;
			-  returns value of integer array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex" 

		function integerindex(const fieldno,aindex: integer): integer;
			- returns row number of integer array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex"

		function integerindexar(const fieldno: integer): integerarty;
			- returns all bunch of indexes of integer array "fiedlno"

		function integerar(const fieldno: integer): integerarty;
			- returns all bunch of data of integer array "fiedlno"
   
		function floatvaluephys(const fieldno,aindex: integer): realty;
			-  returns value of real/datetime array "fieldno" at row number "aindex" 

		function floatvaluelog(const fieldno,aindex: integer): realty;
			-  returns value of real/datetime array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex" 

		function floatindex(const fieldno,aindex: integer): integer;
			- returns row number of real/datetime array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex"

		function floatindexar(const fieldno: integer): integerarty;
			- returns all bunch of indexes of real/datetime array "fiedlno"

		function floatar(const fieldno: integer): realarty;
			- returns all bunch of data of real/datetime array "fiedlno"   

		function textvaluephys(const fieldno,aindex: integer): msestring;
			-  returns value of widestring array "fieldno" at row number "aindex" 

		function textvaluelog(const fieldno,aindex: integer;
                       const caseinsensitive: boolean): msestring;
			-  returns value of widestring array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex" 

		function textindex(const fieldno,aindex: integer;
                      const caseinsensitive: boolean): integer;
			- returns row number of widestring array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex"

		function textindexar(const fieldno: integer;
                            const caseinsensitive: boolean): integerarty;
			- returns all bunch of indexes of widestring array "fiedlno"

		function textar(const fieldno: integer): msestringarty;
			- returns all bunch of data of widestring array "fiedlno"   

   
		function lookupinteger(const integerkeyfieldno,integerfieldno,
                                keyvalue: integer): integer; overload;
			- returns value of integer array "integerfieldno" at position where
				value of parallel integer array "integerkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
                ( 0 if not found )

		function lookupinteger(const stringkeyfieldno,integerfieldno: integer;
                         const keyvalue: msestring): integer; overload;
			- returns value of integer array "integerfieldno" at position where
				value of parallel widestring array "stringkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
                ( 0 if not found )

		function lookuptext(const integerkeyfieldno,textfieldno,
                                keyvalue: integer): msestring; overload;
			- returns value of integer array "textfieldno" at position where
				value of parallel integer array "integerkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
                ( '' if not found )

		function lookuptext(const stringkeyfieldno,textfieldno: integer;
                      const keyvalue: msestring): msestring; overload;
			- returns value of integer array "textfieldno" at position where
				value of parallel integer array "integerkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
                ( '' if not found )


		function lookupfloat(const integerkeyfieldno,floatfieldno,
                                keyvalue: integer): realty; overload;
			- returns value of real/datetime array "floatfieldno" at position where
				value of parallel integer array "integerkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
                ( emptyreal if not found )

		function lookupfloat(const stringkeyfieldno,floatfieldno: integer;
                                keyvalue: msestring): realty; overload;

			- returns value of real/datetime array "floatfieldno" at position where
				value of parallel widestring array "stringkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
                ( emptyreal if not found )

		function count: integer; - returns number of data rows

		property fieldcounttext: integer; -  returns/sets number of widestring arrays
		property fieldcountfloat: integer; - returns/sets number of real/datetime arrays
		property fieldcountinteger: integer; - returns/sets number of integer arrays

		 the above "fieldcount*" props clear the buffer on setting a value 

		property integervalue[const fieldno,aindex: integer]: integer; - a shortcut to "integervaluephys"
		property floatvalue[const fieldno,aindex: integer]: realty; - a shortcut to "floatvaluephys"
		property textvalue[const fieldno,aindex: integer]: msestring; - a shortcut to "textvaluephys"

		property onchange: notifyeventty; 
			- called in "changed" wich in turn is called in :
				= clearbuffer
				= endupdate
				= doasyncevent
				= loaded
				= tlookupbuffer.addrow

TLookupBuffer

tlookupbuffer = class(tcustomlookupbuffer)

	- extends "tcustomlookupbuffer" with methods of run-time data filling

	- see <tcustomlookupbuffer>

	+= Extentions to the public interface:

		procedure addrow(const integervalues: array of integer;
                    const textvalues: array of msestring;
                    const floatvalues: array of realty);

			- adds one row to each of widestring arrays, integer arrays and real/datetime arrays,
			array size of  "{type}values" equals to number of {type} arrays

   		procedure addrows(const integervalues: array of integerarty;
                    const textvalues: array of msestringarty;
                    const floatvalues: array of realarty);

			- adds many data rows  to each of widestring arrays, integer arrays and real/datetime arrays, 
			only min length of the input data arrays are inserted, longer data are truncated
			array size of  "{type}values" equals to number of {type} arrays and the size of "{type}values[i]"
			describes number od data elements in the array
		

TDBLookupBuffer

tdblookupbuffer = class(tcustomdblookupbuffer -> tcustomlookupbuffer)

	- extends "tcustomlookupbuffer" with interface to fill arrays with DB-data
	- see <tcustomlookupbuffer> & <tcustomdblookupbuffer>

	 Extentions to the public interface:

   		procedure checkbuffer; - if data obsolete ("invalid") then reloads them from "datasource"
   
		property datasource: tdatasource; - sets/returns DB data source where to load data from
		property textfields: tdbfieldnamearrayprop; - allows to assign a {datasource:datafield} to each of widestring arrays
		property integerfields: tdbfieldnamearrayprop; - allows to assign a {datasource:datafield} to each of integer arrays
		property floatfields: tdbfieldnamearrayprop; - allows to assign a {datasource:datafield} to each of real/datetime arrays

		property optionsdb: lbdboptionsty; - tunes some DB behaviour apects
			-	olbdb_closedataset : 
				= once data obsolete, opens (if needed) the supplier dataset (disabling its bound controls) 
				then [re]loads data from it then closes it

			-	olbdb_invalidateifmodified :
				= gets marked "invalid" once contents of the bound dataset change, 
				it signals to reload the buffer with the new data just before next accessing 
				( for any purpose - searching, lookuping, getting value/(array of values),..)

TDBmemoLookupbuffer

- allows to use  for lookup-ing any text-convertable DB-fields
	- an analog of tdblookupbuffer, but :
		- "integerfields" may be names of any integer-convertable DB-fields
		- "floatfields" may be names of any (real/datetime)-convertable DB-fields
		- "textfields"  may be names of any text-presentable DB-fields

		- each DB-field value ( presenting a memo generally of many lines ) may supply many data rows at once 
		to the bound array of the buffer, since this value will be internally splitted & turned into native array values,
		and the resulting "count" (arrays row count) of the whole buffer will be the minimal rows count amongst arrays 
		of the buffer, the rest data are truncated 

		- when loading widestring arrays, also checks for & performs "utf8-to-widestring" conversion of values of 
		the bound DB-fields so that these arrays always store widestrings

TThreadComp

TStatFile

- so that to be in effect, it should also be assigned to the form where the widget using the stafile is placed on
- in design, if "onstatwrite" is set and "filedir" is not yet created,	deactivate exception "ECreateError" in project settings ( "Debugger" tab )
- "filedir" may contain "~/" indicating the user's home directory
- options "oe_savestate" & "oe_savevalue" of "client" widgets define what to store to the file 
- position etc changes or/and value changes 
- in case when a main form shares its stafile with non-main forms, on creating non-main ones, just edited not saved data of the main form ( bound to vars of the statfile) are reset to values read from the statfile upon creating the form; for "sfo_memory", this effect absents unless widgets on the concurring forms share same variable[s]; to avoid this behaviour, disable "fo_autoreadstat" & "fo_autowritestat" of the non-main forms
- each "tstafile" owns:
 = tstatwriter:
* provides methods of writing sections & statvars to a memory/file stream
- tstatreader:
* holds list of sections with statvars each
* provides search & check & reading interface to the statvars
* provides reading statvars from a memory/file stream

Positioning to a section speeds up accessing its statvars

- there also is "tstatfiler" ( exposed by some "tstatfile" events ) which:
= may present or "tstatwriter" or "tstatreader" ( there's a check method )
= provides directionless "update" methods with internal switch to needed direction of processing 
- "reading" or "writing" statvars on per-section basis


	activator :
		<see tactivator> : NOT YET DONE		

	encoding = "en_utf8" selected here, allows to store non-Latin text in the file
       filedir = directory where to keep the file ( by default - the current working directory )
	filename = name of the file

	options:
		sfo_memory = reads & writes not from a disk file but from a named memory stream 
					( there's an exclusion - see below "sfo_savedata" ),
					mostly useful for presenting last used values on recalling 
					non-main forms etc ( data even survive recreating forms),
					or even for data "exchange" between non-main modal( non-concurring ) forms 
					in case of the target widgets share same statvarnames

		sfo_createpath = creates "filedir" if necessary
		sfo_savedata =	used only with "sfo_memory", commands to save 
						the memory data to the master statfile (see below)						

	sfo_activatorread = activator activate triggers reading ???
	sfo_activatorwrite = activator deactivate triggers writing ???

	statfile = a master statfile
	statvarname = name of section of this file in the upper statfile
	Tag = an integer property for misc purposes

	Event handlers:
		onstatafterread - fires on return from "readstat"
		onstatafterwrite - fires on return from "writestat"
		onstatbeforeread - fires on beginning of "readstat"
		onstatbeforewrite - fires on beginning of "writestat"
		onstatread = fires after reading state data
		onstatwrite = fires after writing state data
		onstatupdate = fires after reading/writing state data just before 
					"onstatread" & "onstatwrite"

	Public methods:

   		procedure initnewcomponent(const ascale: real); override;
   			- does nothing but fixes the default file name as the statfile default
   
   		procedure readstat(stream: ttextstream = nil); overload;
   			- rereads all statvars of the stafile/memorystream
   
   		procedure readstat(const aname: msestring; const statreader: tstatreader); overload;
   			- rereads "aname" statvar of the statfile

   		procedure writestat(const stream: ttextstream = nil); overload;
		   	- rewrites all statvars to the stafile/memorystream
			  (if neccessary, prepares to writting - creates "filedir", stafile,...)
   
   		procedure writestat(const aname: msestring; const statwriter: tstatwriter); overload;
   			- overwrites "aname" statvar of the statfile
   		
   		procedure updatestat(const aname: msestring; const statfiler: tstatfiler);
   			- depending on kind of "statfiler" ( writer/reader ), writes/reads 
   			  the most up-to-date stat data

TTimer

TNoGuiAction

TPipeReadercomp

TSysEnvManager

TProcessMonitor

TFilechangeNotifier

TShortCutController

TPostscriptPrinter

TGdiPrinter

TWmfPrinter

TSkinController

TGuiThreadComp

Font

See also : Reference:_MSEgui/TFont

Any Font

    	charset { ANSI/ DEFAULT/ SYMBOL /SHIFTJIS /HANGEUL /GB2312 /CHINESEBIG5 /OEM 
		/JOHAB / HEBREW/ ARABIC/ GREEK/ TURKISH/ VIETNAMESE/ THAI/ EASTEUROPE/
		RUSSIAN/ MAC/ BALTIC }
		- changes the font to the nearest containing the selected encoding(charset)
		- no font change made if the supplied encoding doesn't match any font
	color
		- color of the glyphs contours
	colorbackground
		- fill color of the glyph cells ( not including extraspace )
	colorshadow
		- color of SE glyph "edges" ( if not "cl_none", deactivates "colorbackground" )
	extraspace
		- v-space between glyph cells of adjacent text rows (negative values cause the cells to overlap )
	height
		- v-size of glyph cells, in pixels
	name
		- initially, font is choosen by { "family" = this name }
	options:
		foo_fixed
			- changes the font to the nearest "mono" spaced (usually = Courier)
		foo_proportional
			- changes the font to the nearest "proportionally" spaced (usually = Helvetica)
		foo_helvetica
			- changes the font to the nearest in "sans" category (usually = Helvetica)
		foo_roman
			- changes the font to the nearest in "serif" category (usually = Times[ New Roman])
		foo_script
			- Win32 only, changes the font to the nearest in "script" category
		foo_decorative
			- Win32 only, changes the font to the nearest in "decorative" category
		foo_antialiased
			- Linux-only, enables antialiasing (if disabled by Xft globally)
		foo_nonantialiased
			- Linux-only, disables antialiasing (if enabled by Xft globally) 
			usually making glyph extents (not cells !) a bit wider
	style:
		fs_bold
			- gives the font a "bold" look
		fs_italic
			- gives the font an "italic" look
		fs_underline
			- gives the font an "underlined" look
		fs_strikeout
			- gives the font a "striked out" look
		fs_selected
			- "TRUE" here combined with {tf_noselect:=FALSE}, causes the text described by this font 
			to be initially selected ( with the clipboard operations available ), 
			currently applicable only to richstrings

	width
		- 10*{ glyph cell width, average in pixels }, 0 = {font default}

	xscale
		- width ratio of each glyph {cell & contour}, the effect is similar to "width"

		*** "foo_*" font selection overrides one made with "name" 

		*** if change with "foo_*" is unsuccessful then the nearest "sans" font is usually chosen

		*** The categories :

			sans		=> have no serifs and have strokes of even thickness
			serif		=> have serifs at glyph contours and made up of strokes of varying thickness
			script		=> resemble handwriting
			decorative	=> flashy styles to be used sparingly in headlines or posters

GUI

TWindow

twindow = class(teventobject,icanvas)
  public

	// releases mouse, unlinks from the canvas, processes all pending events of the window
	// if called from within main thread then destroys the window directly
	// otherwise posts a window destroy event for oneself and waits for it to be processed
	procedure destroywindow;

	// registers the instance of onself in the "owner" widget, allocates the canvas, 
	// adds a reference to oneself,
	// then prepares the "owner" hierarchy to be invalidated ( "owner.rootchanged" )
	// since now, the window is allocated and belongs to the "aowner" widget 
	constructor create(aowner: twidget);

	destructor destroy; override;

	// adds "method" to the internal list of scroll dependants
	procedure registeronscroll(const method: notifyeventty);

	// removes "method" from the internal list of scroll dependants
	procedure unregisteronscroll(const method: notifyeventty);

	// releases mouse if captured, resets the cursor, then enters an event loop for the window,
	// TRUE on return if the window is destroyed
	function beginmodal: boolean;
 
	  * checks if the "sender" window is already modal to avoid circularity, 
	    if not then starts an event loop  for the "sender" where the "sender" is a receiver of GUI events,
   	    once the loop is terminated reactivates the previously active window if it was,
	    TRUE if modalwindow destroyed  

	  function tinternalapplication.beginmodal(const sender: twindow): boolean;

	// removes the internal stuff which indicates the modal state
	procedure endmodal;

	// if the window is visible, 
	// deactivates the previously active window, shows the window (see below),
	// if no active window in the app or the window or its Z-predecessor is modal and 
	// the app has no focused widget then prepares the bound widget to be focused,
	// then addresses the WM to put the window to foreground
	procedure activate;

	  // if the bound widget has visible=true then:
	  //  - if NOT windowevent then :
	  //    = address the WM to set size of the window acc to window opts 
	  //      wp_maximized, wp_fullscreen or normal size otherwise
	  //	= if the window is normally sized, moves it to its default position is specified ( screen centered etc )
	  // - unhides/unminimizes the window if needed
	  // - shows other windows of the applications acc to state of the window group 
	  // ( in normal size or minimized )

	  private 
		procedure twindow.show(windowevent: boolean);

	// TRUE if this window currently grabs user input
	( a widget drawn within the window(=form) is in focus,.. )
	function active: boolean;

	// if the window was active then deactivates the window  & remembers it as the previous active ( to restore leater if requested ),
	// returns TRUE if that storage occurred
	function deactivateintermediate: boolean; 

	// makes the window active & clears the above app reference to it ( "active before deactivating" )
	procedure reactivate; //clears app.finactivewindow

	// scans the app event queue for "ek_expose" event[s] addressed to the window,
	// if found then redraws that part of the window which the event describes
	// ( processed events are then deleted )
	procedure update;

	// TRUE if the window :
	// 1) doesn't have an inner widget grabbing input focus
	// or
	// 2) has such widget, and this widget ( and all its descendants ) 
	//    pass "CanClose" check
	//
	// *** see also "twidget.CanClose" ***
	//
	function candefocus: boolean;

	// tries to defocus the currently focused widget if it belongs to the window,
	// if succeeds then executes code of virtual "DoDefocus" of the widget descessor
	// ( this code defines behaviour & look of the widget on defocusing );
	//
	// no defocusing is done if the focused widget ( or its descendants ) 
	// doesn't pass "CanClose" check
	//
	procedure nofocus;
   
   	// setfocusedwidget(widget)
   
   property focuscount: cardinal read ffocuscount;
   function close: boolean; //true if ok
   procedure beginmoving; //lock window rect modification
   procedure endmoving;
   procedure bringtofront;
   procedure sendtoback;
   procedure stackunder(const predecessor: twindow);
       //stacking is performed in mainloop idle, nil means top
   procedure stackover(const predecessor: twindow);
       //stacking is performed in mainloop idle, nil means bottom
   function stackedunder: twindow; //nil if top
   function stackedover: twindow;  //nil if bottom
   function hastransientfor: boolean;

   procedure capturemouse;
   procedure releasemouse;
   procedure postkeyevent(const akey: keyty; 
        const ashiftstate: shiftstatesty = []; const release: boolean = false;
                  const achars: msestring = '');

   function winid: winidty;
   function haswinid: boolean;
   function state: windowstatesty;
   function visible: boolean;
   function activating: boolean; //in internalactivate proc
   function normalwindowrect: rectty;
   property updateregion: regionty read fupdateregion;
   function updaterect: rectty;

   procedure registermovenotification(sender: iobjectlink);
   procedure unregistermovenotification(sender: iobjectlink);

   property options: windowoptionsty read foptions;

	// widget 
	property owner: twidget read fowner;

   property focusedwidget: twidget read ffocusedwidget;
   property transientfor: twindow read ftransientfor;
   property modalresult: modalresultty read fmodalresult write setmodalresult;
   property buttonendmodal: boolean read getbuttonendmodal write setbuttonendmodal;
   property globalshortcuts: boolean read getglobalshortcuts write setglobalshortcuts;
   property localshortcuts: boolean read getlocalshortcuts write setlocalshortcuts;
   property windowpos: windowposty read getwindowpos write setwindowpos;
   property caption: msestring read fcaption write setcaption;


 windowoptionty = (wo_popup,wo_message,wo_buttonendmodal,wo_groupleader,
                   wo_windowcentermessage); //showmessage centered in window


	optionswindow:
		wo_popup 
			- in run-time, hides all OS windows-manager ( WM ) decorations (title bar, buttons "Close/Resize,Min/Max" etc),
			letting only its client area to appear
			so :
				= the window should have own facilities to replace the deactivated WM functionality if needed
				= can't be resized/maximize/minimized/moved
		wo_message
			- similar to "wo_popup" but allows WM to close ( with "Close" button ) & move the window

		wo_groupleader
			- keeps on the WM taskbar a shortcut to the window 
			( if the parent window is a groupleader too then displays a step upper in its group )

	Event handlers:

	 - onmove
		= fires once the (window/widget) is created/moved ( with check if really moved by a distance)

TFormScrollbox

- presents client area of form & parent of its widgets, 
	initially stretched to fit the form & bound with anchoring 
	but may be adjusted with "bounds" & "anchors"
   
    Properties:
                
	anchors
	bounds
	
	color
		- color of the whole container area ( except its frame ) & form widgets 
		if their color is "cl_parent"

	name = container

	cursor,	enabled, face, frame, helpcontext, hint, optionswidget, popupmenu,
	taborder, tag, visible, onactivate, onafterpaint, onbeforepaint, 
	onchildmouseevent, onclientmouseevent, ondeativate, ondefocus, onenter,
	onexit, onfocus, onfontheightdelta, onmouseevent, onpaint, onpopup
	onresize, onshowhint
		- the same meaning as for the served form


	oncalcminscrollsize	
	onscroll
	onchildscaled	

TFaceList

TFrameComp

See also here: Reference:_MSEgui/TFrame.


	Terminology :

	{client area = area of the widget which interacts with a user}

	{bevelling = additional facets rising/sinking frame & client area, 
		constists of two parts - 
			- external: between frame and widget
			- internal: between frame and client area
	}

	{frame=	flat space between external & internal facets,
			floats at the inner level of the external facet
 	}

	*** Both frame & bevelling affect the client area ***

	--------------------------
	template:

		colorclient	=	color of the client area

		colorframe =	color of the frame
		colorframeactive =	used instead of colorframe if the widget is
							active; "cl_default" means same as colorframe.

		works if (leveli/levelo <> 0 that's the facets exist :

			colorshadow = color of facets screened from the NW light source
			colordkshadow =	color of shadows dropped by the NW light source
        	        colordkwidth =	width of the shadows in pixel, -1=default

			colorlight = color of facets exposed to the NW light source
			colorhighlight = color of brighter edges of the facets
                 	colorhlwidth = width of the brighter edges in pixel, -1=default

		        extraspace = if applied to menu items, adds more space between these items

		framei_:
			(for extendable widgets like menus, these settings widen the widget,
			for non-extendable like buttons - they squeeze the text area )

			bottom=	lower margin of text to the client area
			left =	left margin of text to the client area
			right =	margin of text to the client area
			top =	upper margin of text to the client area

		framewidth=	width of the frame
	leveli = {width=height} of the internal facet, positive -> raised, negative -> sunken
	levelo = {width=height} of the external facet, positive -> raised, negative -> sunken

<any frame>

	*** extends & customizes "tframecomp" ***

	template
		- "tframecomp" supplying the initial settings

	colorclient,colordkshadow,colordkwidth,colorframe,colorframeactive,
	colorhighlight,colorhlwidth,colorlight,colorshadow,framewidth, 
	leveli, levelo, framei_*,

		<see "tframecomp">

	font
		<see "tfont">

	caption	
		- some descriptive text( function name, user prompt,...) placed 
		in a N/W/S/E-combination to the widget's client area

		*** 
		non-empty caption if (captionpos <> cp_center) & (captiondistouter=false & captiondist>0) enlarges the framed widget 
		by the corresponding size of caption

		***

	captiondist - margin between the caption & the client area

	captiondistouter :

	- if "false"(by default), the distance is measured between 
		the inner (facing the client area) extent of the caption 
		and the client area outward the area, 
		the caption is placed outside of the client area

	- if "true", the caption is mirrored against the edge of client area as 
		to the position when "false"

		*** nagative values of "captiondist" visually inverse "out of" and within ***

       captionnoclip - do not clip frame and client area for caption background 
					( the client area preserves own background under the caption text)

	captionnooffset - shift orthogonal to "captiondist"

	captionpos - "corner" where to place the caption

	localprops :

		frl_levelo - "levelo" overrides "template.levelo"
		frl_leveli - "leveli" overrides "template.leveli"
		frl_framewidth - "framewidth" overrides "template.framewidth"
		frl_colorclient - "colorclient" overrides "template.colorclient"
		frl_colorframe - "colorframe" overrides "template.colorframe"
		frl_colorframeactive - "colorframeactive" overrides "template.colorframeactive"
		frl_colordkshadow - "colordkshadow" overrides "template.colordkshadow"
		frl_colorshadow - "colorshadow" overrides "template.colorshadow"
		frl_colorlight - "colorlight" overrides "template.colorlight"
		frl_colorhighlight - "colorhighlight" overrides "template.colorhighlight"
		frl_colordkwidth - "colordkwidth" overrides "template.colordkwidth"
		frl_colorhlwidth - "colorhlwidth" overrides "template.colorhlwidth"
		frl_fileft - "framei_left" overrides "template.framei_left"
		frl_firight - "framei_right" overrides "template.framei_right"
		frl_fitop - "framei_top" overrides "template.framei_top"
		frl_fibottom - "framei_bottom" overrides "template.framei_bottom"

		frl_nodisable

TFaceComp

See also here: https://wiki.freepascal.org/Reference:_MSEgui/TFace

	- doesn't affect the widget frame but client area of the frame


	template:
		fade:
			color[i]: = colors forming the fade
			direction: = direction where the fade grows to
			gd_(right/up/left/down)

		pos[i]: = relational position of color[i] on the direction (0.0..1.0) extent

			transparency = 	makes the face half-transparent and enlighten the underlying widget  
							with a light source of the selected color 
							( in this case, colors of the face & the widget & the light source 
							simply summarize to higher brightness )

		image:
			see <any image>

		options:

        	*** The fade colors are used not as colors but RGB alpha values ($00 -> opaque, $ff -> transparent) 
			if fao_alpha* are set *** :

				fao_alphafadeall = applies blending to the widget & all its children
				fao_alphafadenochildren = preserves child widgets from blending
		                fao_alphafadeimage = applies blending to "face.image" 


<any face>

	*** extends & customizes "tfacecomp" ***

	fade, image, option
		- see "tfacecomp"
	
	template
		- "tfacecomp" supplying the initial settings

	localprops :
		fal_options - "options" overrides "template.options"
		fal_fadirection - "fade.direction" overrides "template.fade.direction"
		fal_image - "image" overrides "template.image"
		fal_fapos - "fade.pos[i]" overrides "template.fade.pos[i]"
		fal_facolor - "fade.color[i]" overrides "template.fade.color[i]"
		fal_fatransparency - "fade.transparency" overrides "template.fade.transparency"

TBitmapComp

TScalingwidget

   optionsscale : 
		autosizing to provide room for :
		= {"frame.caption" + "offset_*"}
		= "offset_*" if "frame.caption" is unset and "osc_shrink*" is set
	
		= osc_expandx 
			- makes the widget wider to fit the caption if needed

		= osc_shrinkx
			- makes the widget narrower to have no space left & right to the "frame.caption"

		= osc_expandy
			- makes the widget taller to fit the caption if needed

		= osc_shrinky
			- makes the widget lower to have no space up & down to the "frame.caption"

		= osc_invisishrinkx
			- fully h-collapses if "visible=false" ( run-time only )

		= osc_invisishrinky
			- fully v-collapses if "visible=false" ( run-time only )

TImageList

TPopupMenu

TMainMenu

Dialog

TFileListview

TFileDialog

TFaceComp

TFileNameEdit

TDirDropdownEdit

TColorEdit

TMemoDialogEdit

TPageSizeSelector

TPageOrientationSelector

Application

TGuiApplication

 tguiapplication = class(tcustomapplication)
  public

   // [re]starts the system timer with the new period and 
   // subscribes the application to be a receiver of the modified "ek_timer" event 
   // ( can check for it in the event queue )
   procedure settimer(const us: integer);

   // finds a window by its winID
   function findwindow(id: winidty; out window: twindow): boolean;

   // finds a window by its ID & adjusts "rect" so that it 
   // fits "bounds_minc*" & "bounds_maxc*" of the found window
   procedure checkwindowrect(winid: winidty; var rect: rectty);

   // initialises the timer and "megraphics"
   procedure initialize;

   // frees the allocated system resources (GDI, event subscription, the timer)
   procedure deinitialize;

   // creates a form instance, it will be shown in "application.run"
   procedure createform(instanceclass: widgetclassty; var reference);

   // invalidates all registered forms ( all their widgets will be redrawn )
   procedure invalidate; 
   
   // calls a nested main event loop, forces processing any pending messages,
   procedure processmessages; override; //handle with care!

   // TRUE if no pending events to process for the application
   function idle: boolean; override;
   
   // requests to indicate waiting ( to show the "watches" cursors )
   procedure beginwait; override;

   // removes the "watches" if no unclosed requests for displaying them,
   // otherwise closes the currently active request
   procedure endwait; override;

   // TRUE if there are unclosed requests for displaying "watches"
   function waiting: boolean;

   // TRUE if ESC has just been pressed
   //  - if all requests for displaying "watches" are closed then refreshes 
   //    the internal list of events ( the GUI-queue -> the app event list)
   function waitescaped: boolean; //true if escape pressed while waiting

   // sets state of the current wait dialogue ( but doesn't close one ) to undefined
   procedure resetwaitdialog;   

   // runs "aexecuteaction" in the main thread in OnIdle mode,
   // then shows a cancellable message,
   // if the one is cancelled then runs "acancelaction" then 
   // either fully clears (if exceptions occur ) 
   // or terminates the execution otherwise,
   // true if not cancelled;
   // "application.processmessages" must be called regularly if "aexecuteaction" is used here,
   // alternatively "aidleaction" can be used, call sleep ( some time ) in order to minimize
   // processor load. 
   // If athread <> nil the function starts and terminates the thread    
   function waitdialog(const athread: tthreadcomp = nil; const atext: msestring = '';
                   const caption: msestring = '';
                   const acancelaction: notifyeventty = nil;
                   const aexecuteaction: notifyeventty = nil): boolean; override;

   // closes the currently modal waitdialogue with "cancelled" state
   procedure cancelwait;

   // closes the currently modal waitdialogue with "ok" state
   procedure terminatewait;

   function waitstarted: boolean;   // the last waitdialogue is currently showing for some requests
   function waitcanceled: boolean;  // the last waitdialogue has been cancelled for some request (but can be shown fot others ?)
   function waitterminated: boolean; // the last waitdialogue has been terminated for some request (but can be shown fot others ?) 

   // if called from the main app thread then shows as a modal message describing the exception 
   // otherwise posts an async event for which the message will be called
   procedure showexception(e: exception; const leadingtext: string = ''); override;

   // posts an async event for which the message describing the exception will be called
   procedure showasyncexception(e: exception; const leadingtext: string = '');

   // "application.errormessage" shows standard error message ( with "ERROR" title ) 
   procedure errormessage(const amessage: msestring); override;

   // [re]calculates timings & position of hint for "ahintedwidget"
   // if "ow_timedhint" in "ahintedwidget.foptionswidget" then iys showtime will be 
   // "defaulthintshowtime" ( an app wide setting, 3sec by default)   
   procedure inithintinfo(var info: hintinfoty; const ahintedwidget: twidget);


   // shows the supplied hint text within "aposrect" with alignment "aplacement" during "ashowtime",
   // the avail ( but not used currenly ) flags are : hfl_show,hfl_custom,hfl_noautohidemove,hfl_noautohidemove   
   procedure showhint(const sender: twidget; const hint: msestring;
              const aposrect: rectty; const aplacement: captionposty = cp_bottomleft;
              const ashowtime: integer = defaulthintshowtime; //0 -> inifinite,
                 // -1 defaultshowtime if ow_timedhint in sender.optionswidget
              const aflags: hintflagsty = defaulthintflags
                      ); overload;

   // shows the supplied hint text at left-top position"apos" during "ashowtime",
   // the avail ( but not used currenly ) flags are : hfl_show,hfl_custom,hfl_noautohidemove,hfl_noautohidemove   
   procedure showhint(const sender: twidget; const hint: msestring;
              const apos: pointty;
              const ashowtime: integer = defaulthintshowtime; //0 -> inifinite,
                 // -1 defaultshowtime if ow_timedhint in sender.optionswidget
              const aflags: hintflagsty = defaulthintflags
                      ); overload;

   // shows the hint fully defined in "info" for the widget "sender"
   procedure showhint(const sender: twidget; const info: hintinfoty); overload;

   // removes the current hint widget & frees its resources & stops its stop timer
   procedure hidehint;

   // restarts the current hint and its stop timer
   procedure restarthint(const sender: twidget);

   function hintedwidget: twidget; //last hinted widget
   function activehintedwidget: twidget; //nil if no hint active

   // returns helpcontext of active widget, '' if none;   
   function activehelpcontext: msestring;

   // returns helpcontext of the widget under mouse, '' if none;
   function mousehelpcontext: msestring;

   // TRUE if one of the app's window/console is in input focus
   function active: boolean;

   // returns the desktop resolution ( or the virtual one if used )
   function screensize: sizety;

   // returns the (virtual) desktop resolution except the tray area,
   // nil -> current active window
   function workarea(const awindow: twindow = nil): rectty;

   // returns which application window ( a form not an eventwidget, an openglwidget or a windowwidget !) 
   // is active ( provides the input focus ),
   // it's same for all widgets of the form served by this window
   function activewindow: twindow;

/ * A transient window is a descendant of ( "transientfor" ) another window in the stacking order hierarchy */

   // returns a first non-transient ( on top of the app stacking order ) window upward 
   // from the currently active window of the application.
   // or that active window if no such
   function regularactivewindow: twindow;

   // same as "activewindow" but the window must not be released (?)
   function unreleasedactivewindow: twindow;

   // returns the focused widget of the currently active window if one exists
   function activewidget: twidget;

   // returns the widget presenteing the currently active window
   function activerootwidget: twidget;
   
   // returns the window ( not hidden or disabled !) under the screen point "pos"
   function windowatpos(const pos: pointty): twindow;

   // puts to "awidget" the container of widget pointed by "namepath"
   // ( finalizing "." is discarded if found ) ,
   // FALSE if not found, and NIL and TRUE if "namepath" = ''
   function findwidget(const namepath: string; out awidget: twidget): boolean;

   // rebuilds the application's window list accorrding to the current on-screen Z-order of its windows;
   // window list is ordered by "z" - bottom first & top last;
   // invisibles first
   procedure sortzorder;

   // returns a copy of the internal window list of application
   function windowar: windowarty;

   // returns the list of application window winIDs
   function winidar: winidarty;

   // returns the count of the application windows    
   function windowcount: integer;

   // returns the window by its number ( "index" >= 0) in the application window list
   property windows[const index: integer]: twindow read getwindows;

   // returns the lowest visible window in stackorder, 
   // calls "sortzorder" within
   function bottomwindow: twindow;

   // returns the highest visible window in stackorder, 
   // calls "sortzorder" within
   function topwindow: twindow;


   // TRUE if all owned windows pass "CanClose" check or 
   // don't have focused widgets
   function candefocus: boolean;

   // subscribes the handler "method" to receive keyboard events
   procedure registeronkeypress(const method: keyeventty);

   // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving keyboard events
   procedure unregisteronkeypress(const method: keyeventty);

   // subscribes the handler "method" to receive shortcut events
   procedure registeronshortcut(const method: keyeventty);

   // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving shortcut events
   procedure unregisteronshortcut(const method: keyeventty);

   // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnWindowActiveChanged" event ( form-wide )
   procedure registeronactivechanged(const method: activechangeeventty);

   // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnWindowActiveChanged" event ( form-wide )
   procedure unregisteronactivechanged(const method: activechangeeventty);

   // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
   procedure registeronwindowdestroyed(const method: windoweventty);

   // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
   procedure unregisteronwindowdestroyed(const method: windoweventty);

   // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnWindowDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
   procedure registeronwiniddestroyed(const method: winideventty);

   // unsubscribes the handler "method" form receiving "OnWindowDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
   procedure unregisteronwiniddestroyed(const method: winideventty);

   // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "ApplicationActiveChanged" events ( form-wide )
   procedure registeronapplicationactivechanged(const method: booleaneventty);

   // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "ApplicationActiveChanged" events ( form-wide )
   procedure unregisteronapplicationactivechanged(const method: booleaneventty);

// tcustomapplication

   // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnTerminated" event ( form-wide )
   procedure registeronterminated(const method: notifyeventty);

   // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnTerminated" events ( form-wide )
   procedure unregisteronterminated(const method: notifyeventty);

   // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnTerminateQuery" event ( form-wide )
   procedure registeronterminate(const method: terminatequeryeventty);

   // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnTerminateQuery" event ( form-wide )
   procedure unregisteronterminate(const method: terminatequeryeventty);

   // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnIdle" event ( form-wide )
   procedure registeronidle(const method: idleeventty);

   // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnIdle" events ( form-wide )
   procedure unregisteronidle(const method: idleeventty);

   // calls "canclose" of all application windows except the "sender" window 
   // if all "canclose"are TRUE then checks "OnTerminateQuery" 
   // for all its subscribers ( usually forms of the application )
   procedure terminate(const sender: twindow = nil); 

   // TRUE as long as a "terminate" call is in progress
   function terminating: boolean;

   // TRUE as long as a "deinitialize" call is in progress
   function deinitializing: boolean;
   
   // returns the current caret object ( the text input focus indicator ) of the application
   / ( this object provides facilities to control position & appearance & visibility & timings of the caret )
   property caret: tcaret read fcaret;

   // returns the current mouse object of the application
   / ( this object provides facitities to control position & appearance of the mouse )   
   property mouse: tmouse read fmouse;

   // simulates mouseparkevent 
   // ( an adjusting mouse movement without user intervention - grid snapping, docking etc ?)
   procedure mouseparkevent;

   // sets mouse position correction for further mouse events,
   // the real position is less the visual one by the supplied shift
   procedure delayedmouseshift(const ashift: pointty);

   // returns/sets a cursor shape used for widgets having their cursor shape set to "cr_default";
   // setting it to "cr_default" restores the individual widget cursor(s)
   property widgetcursorshape: cursorshapety read fwidgetcursorshape write
                                        fwidgetcursorshape;

   // returns/sets the current application-wide cursor shape ( not "watches" if a waiting dialog is currently displayed ! )
   // or request to set a new cursor shape ( app-wide );
   // doesn't change when changing mouse widgets
   // 
   // if called from a non-main app thread & no waiting dialogue displayed then redraws 
   // the cursor immediately;
   // set it to "cr_default" to restore the shape to one set by "widgetcursorshape"
   //
   property cursorshape: cursorshapety; // cr_arrow, cr_*

   // assures the displayed mouse cursor shape to be the shape assigned to the currently under-mouse widget,
   // otherwise "cr_default" 
   procedure updatecursorshape; //restores cursorshape of mousewidget

   // returns a widget of the application where the mouse is currently positioned over
   property mousewidget: twidget read fmousewidget;

   // returns a widget of the application currently "owning" the mouse ( grabbing all mouse input )
   property mousecapturewidget: twidget read fmousecapturewidget;


   // returns/sets a window to become the main window of the application
   // then resets all other application windows to the window group it belongs to ( Linux only );
   //
   // the main window minimizes all windows if minimized;
   property mainwindow: twindow read fmainwindow write setmainwindow;

   // returns which system thread was allocated to the application on its start
   // ( the main thread )
   property thread: threadty read fthread;

   // returns teh widget where a mouse button click occured last time 
   // ( to compare with when determinibg whether another widget is clicked )
   property buttonpresswidgetbefore: twidget read fbuttonpresswidgetbefore;

   // returns teh widget where a mouse button release occured last time 
   // ( to compare with when determinibg whether another widget is clicked )
   property buttonreleasewidgetbefore: twidget read fbuttonreleasewidgetbefore;


   // returns/sets the interval of mouse double click recognition ( in microsecs ),
   // defaults to 0.4 sec
   property dblclicktime: integer read fdblclicktime write fdblclicktime default
                 defaultdblclicktime; //us

// tcustomapplication

   // creates a datamodule instance ( its startup code including "OnLoaded" is executed )
   procedure createdatamodule(instanceclass: msecomponentclassty; var reference);


   // enters the application event loop;
   //
   // once the loop finishes, performs "OnTerminated" for all its subscribers,
   // destroys all application forms ( components & windows )
   procedure run;

   // TRUE if the eventloop is entered
   function running: boolean;

   // returns/sets the application name 
   // ( defaults to the full path to application executable in the native OS format );
   // currently, only for informatiion query purposes
   property applicationname: msestring read fapplicationname write fapplicationname;
   

   // if exclusive "rights" are satisfied for the main thread ( a mutex lock is OK )  & the event loop is in progress 
   // then posts the "event" to the main application thread for asyc processing,
   // otherwise adds the event to the internal list for further handling as soon as the above conditions meet
   procedure postevent(event: tevent);

   // TRUE if never idle since last call,
   // unlocks the application and calls sleep if not mainthread and asleepus >= 0
   function checkoverload(const asleepus: integer = 100000): boolean;

   // returns/sets the application exception handler
   property onexception: exceptioneventty read fonexception write fonexception;

   // if not "eabort" & no unhandled exceptions, 
   // executes the above "OnException" code if assigned 
   // or shows an exception message otherwise;
   procedure handleexception(sender: tobject = nil; 
                                       const leadingtext: string = '');

   // synchronizes the calling thread with the main event loop ( via a mutex),
   // TRUE if the calling thread allready holds the mutex,
   // the mutex is recursive
   function lock: boolean;

   // tries to synchronize the calling thread with the main event loop ( via a mutex)
   function trylock: boolean;

   // releases the mutex if the calling thread holds the mutex,
   // TRUE if no unlock done
   function unlock: boolean;

   // releases the mutex recursively if the calling thread holds the mutex,
   // returns "count" for the below "relockall"
   function unlockall: integer;

   // regains the mutex to serve "count" locks
   procedure relockall(count: integer);

   // creates a syncronize event ( which will fire asyncronously then waits for another thread will allow it to finish ), assigns "proc" to it as the event handler, 
   // then frees all locks temporarily then posts the event to the app event queue & waits fot it to be processed the resores the locks;
   // 
   // TRUE if not aborted, quiet -> shows no exceptions if occurs
   //
   // the "syncronize event" is an event owning a semaphore which can be touched by another thread 
   // thus causing "event.waitfo" to return & to exec the event handler code
   //
   function synchronize(const proc: objectprocty;
                       const quite: boolean = false): boolean;

   // TRUE if the calling ( this function ) thread is the application main thread
   function ismainthread: boolean;

   // TRUE if the currently locked thread is the application main thread
   function islockthread: boolean;

   // waith for "athread" to terminate,
   // does "unlock-relock" around waiting
   procedure waitforthread(athread: tmsethread);

   // post a "nothing-to-do" event for asynchronous processing in the main thread 
   procedure wakeupmainthread;

   // invalidates all registered forms of the application so that their widgets redraw land-specific captions 
   // ( changed by "mseconsts.setlangconsts" ),
   // called internally in "setlangconsts" before return
   procedure langchanged; virtual;

   // returns/sets "aps_terminated" state flag ( no actions ? )
   // this flag is also set internally by "terminate" if not cancelled
   property terminated: boolean read getterminated write setterminated;

   // returns the number of "handleexception" calls having an effect ( a message or the handler code )
   property exceptioncount: longword read fexceptioncount;


private
 // function tinternalapplication.beginmodal(const sender: twindow): boolean;

DB

DBedit

DBfields

TDBwidgetgrid

  Properties:

        anchors - ...
	bounds - ...

	color 
		- color of the grid's client area
	cursor 
		- cursor shape when the mouse is over the client area

	datacols
		colorselect
		linecolor
		linecolorfix
		linewidth
		newrowcol

		options
			co_readonly
			co_nofocus
			co_invisible
			co_disabled
			co_drawfocus
			co_mousemovefocus
			co_lefbuttonfocusonly
			co_focusselect
			co_mouseselect
			co_keyselect
			co_multiselect
			co_resetselectionexit
			co_rowselect
			co_fixwidth
			co_fixpos
			co_fill
			co_proportional
			co_nohscroll
			co_savevalue
			co_savestate
			co_rowfont
			co_rowcolor
			co_zebracolor
			co_nosort
			co_sortdescent
			co_norearrange
			co_cancopy
			co_canpaste
			co_mousescrollrow
			co_rowdatachange

		sortcol
		width

		items[N]
			color
			colorselect
			datalist - ???
			face - see <any face>
			fontselect - see <any font>
			frame - see <any frame>
			linecolor
			linecolorfix
			linewidth
			name
			
			options
	

Report

TRepSpacer

TRecordBand

TrepValueDisp

TRepPageNumdisp

TRepPrintDateDisp

TBandGroup

TTileArea

Design

TGdbMi

TSyntaxEdit

TSyntaxPainter

Comm

TCommPort

TAsciiCommPort

TAsciiProtPort

TCommSelector

General stuff

Properties for all widgets


	name

	anchors

		-----------

		- they control of design/runtime sticking widgets to their parents

		- dimention pair ( top/bottom or left/right ) both set to "false" cause 
		the widget to fit the parent's client area in that dimention;
		this effect may be partial in case of "bounds_c*max" settings limit the extents

		*** Return to the look "before dimention fit" is only possible by manual resizing or setting "bounds_*"
		-----------
		an_left 
			- on run-time, resizes/shifts left the widget to keep the design-set distance 
			between the widget's left border and the left side of parent's client area 
			as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins

		an_top
			- on run-time, resizes/shifts up the widget to keep the design-set distance 
			between the widget's top border and the upper side of parent's client area 
			as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins

		an_right
			- on run-time, resizes/shifts right the widget to keep the design-set distance 
			between the widget's right border and the right side of parent's client area 
			as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins

		an_bottom
			- on run-time, resizes/shifts down the widget to keep the design-set distance 
			between the widget's bottom border and the lower side of parent's client area 
			as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins

	bounds

		cx	- width of the widget
		cxmax, cxmin - design/runtime width of the widget is enforced between "cxmax" and "cxmin"
		cy	- height of the widget
		cymax, cymin - design/runtime height of the widget is enforced between "cymax" and "cymin"
		x	- distance between the widget's left border and the left side of parent's client area 
		y	- distance between the widget's top border and the upper side of parent's client area 


	autosize

		-----------
		- only applicable to widgets with "ow_autosize" set
		- the effect may be partial in case when "bounds_c*max" settings limit the extents
		-----------

		cx - addition to width of the widget (with h-centering post applied)
		cy - addition to height of the widget (with v-centering post applied)

	- color
		= the default color of client area & caption text background
		= may be overwritten:
			* the client area - with "frame.colorclient"
			* the caption BG - with "frame.font.colorbackground"

	- font
		= see {any font}

	- frame
		= see {any frame}

	- face
		= see {any face}

	- hint
		= descriptive text appearing when mouse pointer enters the widget

	- cursor
		= shape of the mouse pointer over the client area of widget (run-time only)

	- visible
		= "true" allow the widget to appear ( run-time only )

	- enabled
		= "true" allows the widget to participate in GUI interaction
		= "false" disallows the widget & its children :
			* processing all events & shortcuts & menu calls
			* auto "CanClose" check

			Also "false" usually paints the widget in color marking 
			the "disabled" state ( usually light gray font color )

	- popupmenu
		= reference to a preset tpopupmenu widget serving the right-click menu

	- taborder
		- {0..N} order number when TAB-key cycling through widgets in the container 

	- tag
		- an integer value bound to this widget instance

	- helpcontext
		= a string returned by "(active/mouse)helpcontext" methods of the owning form 
		  when this widget is focused or under mouse in the active window

	- zorder
		= reading: finds the current Z-order of the widget's window
		= setting: if the value = 0 then lowers the widget's window in the stacking hierarchy, otherwise rises


	optionswidget:

		ow_background
			- keeps the window/widget on bottom of the Z-order stack.

		ow_top
			- keeps the window/widget in foreground

		ow_noautosizing
			- when docking, not to resize for the docking area

		ow_mousefocus
			- "false" here disables focusing the widget with mouse
			  ( and "OnFocus" doesn't fire on mouse clicks )

		ow_tabfocus
			- "false" here disables focusing the widget with "TAB" key
			  ( and "OnFocus" doesn't fire on TAB pressed )

		ow_parenttabfocus
			- enters the childs on TAB-focusing then returns to the widget after 
			sequential TAB-ing through its child widgets,
			otherwise TAB-ing cycles on the children if entered

		ow_arrowfocus
			- allows the widget ( and its children in turn ) to be focused with 
			the arrow keys 

		ow_subfocus, ow_arrowfocusin, ow_arrowfocusout
			- in case of arrow keys focusing enabled for child-containing widget, 
			determine behaviour on entering & leaving the widget, see the below table:

			ow_subfocus	| ow_arrowfocusin |	ow_arrowfocusout | effect

			   FALSE           FALSE             FALSE         entering-/leaving-
			   FALSE           FALSE             TRUE          entering-/leaving+
			   FALSE           TRUE              FALSE         entering(nearest)+/leaving-
			   FALSE           TRUE              TRUE          entering(nearest)+/leaving+
			   TRUE            FALSE             FALSE         entering(last focused)+/leaving-
			   TRUE            FALSE             TRUE          entering(last focused)+/leaving+
			   TRUE            TRUE              FALSE         entering(nearest)+/leaving-
			   TRUE            TRUE              TRUE          entering(nearest)+/leaving+

			- "entering" is focusing on a child within the widget
			- "leaving"  is return from last child onto the widget's level
			- "nearest" is the child closest on the arrow direction
			- "last focused" is the child focused on last leaving the widget
 
			*** The Up/Down arrow keys can leave from the children circle, 
				but Left/Right can only toggle between the children ***

			*** mouse entering/leaving isn't controllable by these options


		ow_focusbackonesc 
			- on pressing "Esc", returns input focus to the previously focused widget

		ow_noparentshortcut

			*** disables processing of delegated ( from the parent ) shortcuts *** 

			- "true" here disables processing shortcuts	if they're delegated 
			from the parent widget ( obviously, not processed by the parent )

		ow_nochildshortcut

			*** disables delegating shortcuts to the parent for taking decision *** 

			- if "true" then the widget tries to process it by oneself 
			otherwise it's passed to the parent widget for further chaining

			*** A shortcut can only be processed once ( by one widget ) ***

		ow_canclosenil
			- "true" here allows to continue even if there's contained widget(s) 
			not passing "CanClose" check

		ow_mousetransparent
			- "true" here causes the widget oneself ( not its contained ones ) 
			not to react to mouse events ( just allow them through to the children )

		ow_mousewheel
			- enables/disables {scrolling/navigating} with wheel of ImPS/2 etc mouse

		ow_noscroll
			- don't use screen image scrolling for twidget.scrollrect, 
			redraw the whole scrolled widget rectangle instead;
			sometimes needed with background fades.

		ow_nochildpaintclip
			- 

		ow_destroywidgets
			- "true" here causes calling "free" for all containing widgets as well

		ow_hinton
			- to show the hint even in case of hinting is disabled on the parent
			( "parent.ow_hintoff= true & parent.ow_hinton= false" )

		ow_hintoff 
			- "true" here combined with "ow_hinton=false" fully disables displaying the hint

		ow_multiplehint 
			- "true" here causes the widget to redisplay its hint on each {>3px} move within the widget oneself

        	ow_timedhint 
			- "true" here causes hint of the widget to disappear after a timed inteval (about 2 secs by default)

		ow_fontlineheight (design-time only)
			- causes "extraspace" of the last text line to be drawn, 
			in turn it causes adjustment of widget height if "ow_autoscale" is set
			
			*** makes sence only if "ow_autoscale=true" & ow_autosize=false & "extraspace <> 0" ***

		ow_fontglyphheight (design-time only)
			- causes only interline "extraspace"-s to be drawn, opposite to "ow_fontlineheight" 

		ow_autoscale (design-time only)
			- causes that if the contents change (design OR run-time) so that its' height changes 
			then the widget will be v-scaled as well

		ow_autosize (design-time only)
			- causes that widget's height & width & client area adjust so that to provide space for contents of the client area
			- no design-time change of height/width are possible as long as this option is in effect

		ow_autosizeanright
			- when autosizing & {an_right isn't set}, the design-set right margin against the parent is preserved

		ow_autosizeanbottom
			- when autosizing & {an_bottom isn't set}, the design-set bottom margin against the parent is preserved

	optionsskin:

		- osc_noskin
		- osc_framebuttononly
		- osc_container


	Methods:

	  // tmsecomponent

		// (re)draws the widget according to the related skin if apllicable;
		//
		// also called internally by "loaded" procedure ( before "OnLoaded" code ),
		// by ShowMessage ( for the internal widgets of the message dialogue ), 
		// when creating tab & form & menu widgets
		procedure updateskin(const recursive: boolean = false);

		// TRUE if the instance is created but not yet ready 
		// for interaction & accessing data & appearance change & receiving events etc
		// ( the stage between firing "OnCreate" & "OnLoaded" )
		function loading: boolean;
	
	 {$ifdef FPC}
		procedure setinline(value: boolean); // ?
		procedure setancestor(value: boolean); // ?
	 {$endif}

		// TRUE if all conditios are OK for executing the code of "event" ( a handler must be assigned to the event )
		function canevent(const event: tmethod): boolean;


		// Shortly, replaces the persistent storage of the widget
		//
		// if {value <> nil} then 
		//	- if "instance" is nil then calls "createproc" to create the instance,
		//    then assigns the instance's value:= "value" 
		// otherwise frees "instance"
		procedure setoptionalobject(const value: tpersistent; var instance;
                        createproc: createprocty);

		// creates the persistent storage of the widget via calling "createproc"
		procedure getoptionalobject(const instance: tobject; createproc: createprocty);

		// obtains & puts to "obj" a CORBA interface entry for "aintf" (GUID,...)
		function getcorbainterface(const aintf: ptypeinfo; out obj) : boolean;

        // TRUE if the widget is owned, or "self" otherwise
		function checkowned(component: tcomponent): boolean; 

        // TRUE if the widget is owner, or "self" otherwise
		function checkowner(component: tcomponent): boolean; 

		// return the top-most widget in owner chain starting from this widget
		function rootowner: tcomponent;

		// return the array of owning widgets starting from this widget
		// componentarty[0] is the widget oneself
		function getrootcomponentpath: componentarty;

        // returns items of objeclinker ( which notify this widget )
        // and free notify list ( which are notified by this widget ),
        // duplicates are removed.
        //	
        // Notifies mainly relate to insertion/removal operation on widgets
        // The notify list is maintained by FreeNotification & RemoveFreeNotification
		function linkedobjects: objectarty;

		// sends "event" recursively to child widgets until no more children or 
		// the event is processed ( cea_processed ) by one of the children,
		// "event" will be destroyed if destroyevent= true and not async
		procedure sendcomponentevent(const event: tcomponentevent; 
                                        const destroyevent: boolean = true);

		// sends "event" to each of owning widgets downward from the root owner,
		// "event" will be destroyed if destroyevent= true and not async
		procedure sendrootcomponentevent(const event: tcomponentevent;
                                        const destroyevent: boolean = true);

		// posts an async "atag"-ged event to be handled by oneself
		procedure asyncevent(atag: integer = 0);

		// posts a "tcomponentevent" instance from sender=self, 
		// "kind" is defined when creating the event, 
		// and "tag" may be adjusted after creation
		procedure postcomponentevent(const event: tcomponentevent);

		// returns the classname of the widget if the widget is toplevel, 
		// and "tmsecomponent" otherwise )
		property moduleclassname: string read getmoduleclassname;

		// returns the classname of the widget as the entry of its constructor
		// ( button => tbutton, datamodule => tdm1mo, form => ttstfo, dbstringedit => tdbstringedit,.. )
		property actualclassname: string read getactualclassname;

		// returns "fmsecomponentstate"
		// ( a set of cs_ismodule,cs_endreadproc,cs_loadedproc,cs_noload, cs_hasskin,cs_noskin )
		property msecomponentstate: msecomponentstatesty read fmsecomponentstate;

		// returns/sets a pointer associated with the widget
		// ( contrary to the integer "tag", allows to use an arbitary data type 
		// for associating data )
		property tagpo: pointer read ftagpo write ftagpo;

		// returns/sets a string identifying the widget in the help system
		property helpcontext: msestring read gethelpcontext write fhelpcontext;

	// twidget

		// creates an instance of the widget, owned by "aowner" if not NIL
		constructor create(aowner: tcomponent); override;

		destructor destroy; override;

		// ??
		procedure afterconstruction; override;

		// rescales the widget frame ( if assigned ) then owned widgets ( if exist, recursively ) then bounds_* then the font ( if assigned )
		// called before inserting in parentwidget,
		// calls "scale(ascale)",
		// no visual repainting
		procedure initnewcomponent(const ascale: real); virtual;

 		// restores the "fontheight" to "font.glyphheight" if "ow_fontglyphheight" or
 		// to "font.lineheight" if "ow_fontlineheight" otherwise,
		// ascale is ignored ?
		// calls "synctofontheight->setfontheight",
		// called after inserting in parentwidget,
		// no visual repainting
		procedure initnewwidget(const ascale: real); virtual;

		// creates the widget frame if not yet created
		procedure createframe;

		// creates the widget face if not yet  created
		procedure createface;

		// creates the widget font if not yet  created
		procedure createfont;

		// checks ws_loadlock and csdestroing too
		function isloading: boolean;

		// returns "widgetstatety" - a set of (
		// ws_visible,ws_enabled,ws_active,ws_entered,ws_entering,ws_exiting,
		// ws_focused,ws_mouseinclient,ws_wantmousebutton,ws_wantmousemove,
		// ws_wantmousefocus,ws_iswidget,ws_opaque,ws_nopaint,
		// ws_clicked,ws_mousecaptured,ws_clientmousecaptured,
		// ws_loadlock,ws_loadedproc,ws_showproc,ws_minclientsizevalid,
		// ws_showed,ws_hidden, //used in tcustomeventwidget
		// ws_destroying,ws_staticframe,ws_staticface,ws_isvisible
		//
		// iframe
		function widgetstate: widgetstatesty;

		// returns "widgetstate1ty" - a set of (
		// (ws1_childscaled,ws1_fontheightlock,
		// ws1_widgetregionvalid,ws1_rootvalid,
		// ws1_anchorsizing,ws1_isstreamed,
		// ws1_scaled, //used in tcustomscalingwidget
		// ws1_noclipchildren,
		// ws1_nodesignvisible,ws1_nodesignframe,ws1_nodesignhandles,
		// ws1_nodesigndelete,ws1_designactive,
		// ws1_fakevisible,ws1_nominsize //used for report size calculations
		// )
		property widgetstate1: widgetstates1ty read fwidgetstate1;
		
			* this set of states is needed because the max FPC set size is 32 
			  thus "widgetstate1ty" can't fit all states

		// TRUE if the widget is contained within another widget
		// ( tcomponent stuff )
		function hasparent: boolean; override;               

		// returns the parent component if it's a widget or the grandparent otherwise
		function getparentcomponent: tcomponent; override;   // tcomponent

		// TRUE if "awidget" is an ascendant or the widget or they are the same widget
		function checkdescendent(awidget: twidget): boolean;
		
		// TRUE if app is running and the widget owns the caret or the caret widget
		function hascaret: boolean;

        // TRUE if "winid" allocated and not loading and not destroying,
        // all widgets on a form have "winid" of this form ( a real window allocated by the OS )
        // thus have this function TRUE
		function windowallocated: boolean;

		// TRUE if presents a valid toplevelwindow with assigned "winid"
		function ownswindow: boolean;

		// invalidated area of the widget, the origin is "clientpos" against the roor widget
		function updaterect: rectty; 

		// calls recursively "canclose" for all contained widgets ( the widget oneself excluded! ),
		// TRUE if none of the widgets return FALSE
		//
		// more specialized widgets may have "canclose" overridden 
		// to perform more work than just this call recursion
		// ( not null or range check,.. )
		//
		// "onclosequery" must also pass the check if assigned, for the function to succeed
		function canclose(const newfocus: twidget = nil): boolean; virtual;

        // checks "canclose" first for focused widget of the window ( form,.. ) 
        // if it is a descendant of the widget or the widget oneself,
        // then continues with subwidgets of the widget;
        // also - finishes editing ( snapshots "value" ) in the focused widget before checking
		function canparentclose(const newfocus: twidget): boolean; overload;

		// the above function but with the preserved focus
		function canparentclose: boolean; overload;
                   //newfocus = window.focusedwidget      

		function canfocus: boolean; virtual;
		function setfocus(aactivate: boolean = true): boolean; virtual;//true if ok
		procedure nextfocus; //sets inputfocus to then next appropriate widget

		function findtabfocus(const ataborder: integer): twidget;
                       //nil if cannot focus

		function firsttabfocus: twidget;
		function lasttabfocus: twidget;
		function nexttaborder(const down: boolean = false): twidget;

		function focusback(const aactivate: boolean = true): boolean;
                               //false if focus not changed

		function parentcolor: colorty;
		function actualcolor: colorty; virtual;
		function actualopaquecolor: colorty;
		function backgroundcolor: colorty;
		function translatecolor(const acolor: colorty): colorty;

		procedure widgetevent(const event: twidgetevent); virtual;

		procedure sendwidgetevent(const event: twidgetevent);
                              //event will be destroyed

		procedure release; override;

		function show(const modal: boolean = false; const transientfor: twindow = nil): modalresultty; virtual;

		procedure hide;
		procedure activate(const abringtofront: boolean = true); virtual;
                             //show and setfocus

		procedure bringtofront;
		procedure sendtoback;
		procedure stackunder(const predecessor: twidget);

		procedure paint(const canvas: tcanvas); virtual;
		procedure update; virtual;
		procedure scrollwidgets(const dist: pointty);

		procedure scrollrect(const dist: pointty; const rect: rectty; scrollcaret: boolean);
                             //origin = paintrect.pos

		procedure scroll(const dist: pointty);
                            //scrolls paintrect and widgets

		procedure getcaret;
		procedure scrollcaret(const dist: pointty);
		function mousecaptured: boolean;
		procedure capturemouse(grab: boolean = true);
		procedure releasemouse;
		procedure capturekeyboard;
		procedure releasekeyboard;
		procedure synctofontheight; virtual;

		procedure dragevent(var info: draginfoty); virtual;
		procedure dochildscaled(const sender: twidget); virtual;

		procedure invalidatewidget;     //invalidates whole widget
		procedure invalidate;           //invalidates clientrect
		procedure invalidaterect(const rect: rectty; org: originty = org_client);
		procedure invalidateframestate;

		procedure invalidateframestaterect(const rect: rectty; 
                                        const org: originty = org_client);   
		function hasoverlappingsiblings(arect: rectty): boolean; //origin = pos

		function window: twindow;
		function rootwidget: twidget;

		function parentofcontainer: twidget;
            //parentwidget.parentwidget if parentwidget has not ws_iswidget,
            //parentwidget otherwise

		property parentwidget: twidget read fparentwidget write setparentwidget;
		function getrootwidgetpath: widgetarty; //root widget is last

		// number of contained widgets ( the widget oneself excluded ! )
		function widgetcount: integer;

		function parentwidgetindex: integer; //index in parentwidget.widgets, -1 if none
		property widgets[const index: integer]: twidget read getwidgets;
		function widgetatpos(var info: widgetatposinfoty): twidget; overload;
		function widgetatpos(const pos: pointty): twidget; overload;

		function widgetatpos(const pos: pointty; 
                   const state: widgetstatesty): twidget; overload;

		property taborderedwidgets: widgetarty read gettaborderedwidgets;

		function findtagwidget(const atag: integer; const aclass: widgetclassty): twidget;
              //returns first matching descendent

		property container: twidget read getcontainer;
		function containeroffset: pointty;
		function childrencount: integer; virtual;
		property children[const index: integer]: twidget read getchildwidgets; default;

		function childatpos(const pos: pointty; 
                   const clientorigin: boolean = true): twidget; virtual;

		function getsortxchildren: widgetarty;
		function getsortychildren: widgetarty;
		property focusedchild: twidget read ffocusedchild;
		property focusedchildbefore: twidget read ffocusedchildbefore;

		function mouseeventwidget(const info: mouseeventinfoty): twidget;

		function checkdescendent(widget: twidget): boolean;
                    //true if widget is descendent or self

		function checkancestor(widget: twidget): boolean;
                    //true if widget is ancestor or self

		function containswidget(awidget: twidget): boolean;

		procedure insertwidget(const awidget: twidget); overload;

		procedure insertwidget(const awidget: twidget; const apos: pointty); overload; virtual;
                 //widget can be child

		function iswidgetclick(const info: mouseeventinfoty; const caption: boolean = false): boolean;
		//true if eventtype = et_butonrelease, button is mb_left, clicked and pos in clientrect
 		//or in frame.caption if caption = true, origin = pos

		function isclick(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
		//true if eventtype = et_butonrelease, button is mb_left, clicked and pos in clientrect

		function isdblclick(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
		//true if eventtype = et_butonpress, button is mb_left, pos in clientrect
		// and timedlay to last buttonpress is short

		function isdblclicked(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
		//true if eventtype in [et_buttonpress,et_butonrelease], button is mb_left,
		// and timedlay to last same buttonevent is short

		function isleftbuttondown(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
		//true if eventtype = et_butonpress, button is mb_left, pos in clientrect
		//origin = paintrect.pos

		widgetrect: the widget on-screen area including its frame & frame caption

			paintrect: the widget on-screen area except its frame & frame caption

			clientrect: virtual area which 
				- for non-scrolling widgets, equals to "paintrect", with its "pos:= (0,0)"
				- for scrolling widgets, may be bigger than "paintrect", 
				  also may shift ( change its "pos" ) when scrolling
		
	// the coord of outer top-left corner against the toplevel form = the window owner,
	// including the frame & frame caption 
		function rootpos: pointty; 

	// the coord of the outer top-left corner against the screen ( the WM decorations aren't counted in )
	// includes the frame & frame caption 
		property screenpos: pointty; 

	//  the coord of the outer top-left corner against the parent widget,
	// including the frame & frame caption 
		property widgetrect: rectty; 
		property pos: pointty; // =widgetrect.pos
		property size: sizety; // =widgetrect.size
		property left: integer; // =bounds_x
		property right: integer; //widgetrect.x + widgetrect.cx, sets cx;
		property top: integer;  // =bounds_y
		property bottom: integer; //widgetrect.y + widgetrect.cy, sets cy;
		property width: integer; // =bounds_cx
		property height: integer; // =bounds_cy
		function widgetsizerect: rectty;          //pos = nullpoint

    // the coord of the paint area ( paintrect ) against own outer top-left corner ( against "widgetrect=pos" )
    //  except the frame & frame caption 
		function paintrect: rectty;
		function paintpos: pointty;
		function paintsize: sizety;
		function innerpaintrect: rectty; // mainly equals to paintrect
		function clientwidgetrect: rectty; // mainly equals to paintrect
		function clientwidgetpos: pointty;
		function clippedpaintrect: rectty; // mainly equals to  but clipped by all parentpaintrects
		function innerwidgetrect: rectty;     // mainly equals to paintrect
		function innerclientwidgetpos: pointty;

    // the coord of the paint area ( paintrect ) against own outer top-left corner ( against "widgetrect=pos" )
    //  except the frame caption 
		function framerect: rectty; // =paintrect except the frame caption area
		function framepos: pointty;
		function framesize: sizety;

    // the coord of the client area ( clientrect )  against the paint area ( paintrect )
    //  usually these areas match
		function clientrect: rectty;
		property clientsize: sizety;
		property clientwidth: integer;
		property clientheight: integer;
		property clientpos: pointty;

    // the coord of the paint area of the parent against the paint area of this widget
		function paintrectparent: rectty; //nullrect if parent = nil,

    // the coord of the client area of the parent against the paint area of this widget
		function clientrectparent: rectty; //nullrect if parent = nil,

	// the coord of the inner area against the client area ( clientrect )
		function innerclientrect: rectty;  // mainly equals to clientrect
		function innerclientsize: sizety;
		function innerclientpos: pointty;

		function framewidth: sizety;              //widgetrect.size - paintrect.size
		function clientframewidth: sizety;        //widgetrect.size - clientrect.size
		function innerclientframewidth: sizety;   //widgetrect.size - innerclientrect.size
		function innerframewidth: sizety;         //clientrect.size - innerclientrect.size  

    // the coord of the paint area against the widgetrect(pos) of the parent
		function paintparentpos: pointty;    //origin = parentwidget.pos

    // the coord of the client area against the widgetrect(pos) of the parent
		function clientparentpos: pointty;   //origin = parentwidget.pos

    // the coord of the widgetrect(pos) against the client area of parent
		property parentclientpos: pointty;


		function clientpostowidgetpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
		function widgetpostoclientpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
		function widgetpostopaintpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
		function paintpostowidgetpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
		procedure scale(const ascale: real); virtual;


		property minsize: sizety read fminsize write setminsize;
		property maxsize: sizety read fmaxsize write setmaxsize;
		function maxclientsize: sizety; virtual;


		property anchors: anchorsty read fanchors write setanchors default defaultanchors;
		property defaultfocuschild: twidget read getdefaultfocuschild write setdefaultfocuschild;


		procedure changeclientsize(const delta: sizety); //asynchronous

		function getcanvas(aorigin: originty = org_client): tcanvas;

		function showing: boolean;
               //true if self and all ancestors visible and window allocated

		function isenabled: boolean;
               //true if self and all ancestors enabled

		function active: boolean;
		function entered: boolean;

		function activeentered: boolean; 
			//true if entered and window is regularactivewindow or inactivated

		function focused: boolean;
		function clicked: boolean;

		function indexofwidget(const awidget: twidget): integer;

		procedure changedirection(const avalue: graphicdirectionty;
                                            var dest: graphicdirectionty); virtual;

		// (re)arranges "awidgets" horizontally within the parent's client area 
		// so that awidget[i] were placed next each other 
		// at h-space dist[i], starting from "startx" with the right margin "endmargin";
		// 
		// if the number of "dist" is fewer than the number of "awidgets" then the remaining h-spaces are taken 
		// as the last "dist[i]" or "0" if none;
		// if the number of "dist" is more than the number of "awidgets" then the extra dist[i] are discarded
		// 
		// non-zero "endmargin" causes one of awdidget[i] to h-resize to provide the margin :
		//  - if one or more of awidgets[i] have [an_left,an_right] set then the first of such is resized
		//    otherwise the last awidgets[i] is h-resized 
		// 
		procedure placexorder(
				const startx: integer; 
				const dist: array of integer;
                const awidgets: array of twidget;
                const endmargin: integer = minint);

		// (re)arranges "awidgets" vertically within the parent's client area 
		// so that awidget[i] were placed upper/lower each other 
		// at v-space dist[i], starting from "starty" with the bottom margin "endmargin";
		// 
		// if the number of "dist" is fewer than the number of "awidgets" then the remaining v-spaces are taken 
		// as the last "dist[i]" or "0" if none;
		// if the number of "dist" is more than the number of "awidgets" then the extra dist[i] are discarded
		// 
		// non-zero "endmargin" causes one of awdidget[i] to v-resize to provide the margin :
		//  - if one or more of awidgets[i] have [an_top,an_bottom] set then the first of such is resized
		//    otherwise the last awidgets[i] is v-resized 
		// 
		procedure placeyorder(
				const starty: integer; 
				const dist: array of integer;
                const awidgets: array of twidget;
                const endmargin: integer = minint);
               //origin = clientpos, endmargin by size adjust of widgets 
               //with [an_top,an_bottom], minint -> no change

		// if {mode <> wam_none} then (re)arranges "awidgets" horizontally  within the parent's client area so that 
		// awidgets[0] stays on its place but awidgets[1..N] :
		// - if {mode = wam_end} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_left" set ) so that they right borders match the right border of awidgets[0]
		// - if {mode = wam_start} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_right" set ) so that they left borders match the left border of awidgets[0]
		// - if {mode = wam_center} then awidgets[i>=1] move so that they Y-axes match the Y-axe of awidgets[0]
		//
		// mainly applicable for v-stacked widgets since h-stacked may overlap after such alignment
		//
        // returns the reference point ( the coord of awidgets[0] )
		function alignx(const mode: widgetalignmodety;
                        const awidgets: array of twidget): integer;


		// if {mode <> wam_none} then (re)arranges "awidgets" vertically within the parent's client area so that 
		// awidgets[0] stays on its place but awidgets[1..N] : 
		// - if {mode = wam_end} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_top" set ) so that they bottom borders match the bottom border of awidgets[0]
		// - if {mode = wam_start} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_bottom" set ) so that they top borders match the top border of awidgets[0]
		// - if {mode = wam_center} then awidgets[i>=1] move so that they X-axes match the X-axe of awidgets[0]
		//
		// mainly applicable for h-stacked widgets since v-stacked may overlap after such alignment
		//
        // returns the reference point ( the coord of awidgets[0] )
		function aligny(const mode: widgetalignmodety;
                        const awidgets: array of twidget): integer;

		function actualcursor: cursorshapety; virtual;


	Event handlers:

	- onactivate

		 fires :

		= on receiving input focus, just before "OnFocus"
			
		= forms specific :
			* on 1-st display of the form after "OnLoaded" ( from "Loaded" procedure)
			* on switch back from another apllication/WM ( "oe_activate" event )
			* after closure of a descendant form
			* on minimizing/maximizing the form

	- onchildscaled

		 fires :

		= on child/children resizing due to font height change

		= form widget: once "form.container" {scrolling widget} is loaded

	- ondeactivate
		 fires 
			= form widget: when the form looses input focus
			= non-form widget: when the widget looses input focus

	- ondefocus

		fires 
		= on disabling the widget

	= form widget: if another form is focused
		= non-form widget: if another widget is focused

	- onenter
		= fires on any way of taking parent-wide focus as soon as 
		the parent stores the new child's order, before "OnActivate" & "OnFocus"

	- onexit
		= fires last on parent-wide lossing focus, after "OnDefocus" & "OnDeactivate"
		= for top-level ( not in a container ) forms, doesn't fire

	- onfocus
		fires 
			= once the existing widget takes the focus 
			= on showing the widget's form if the widget has the lowest "TabOrder"

	- onfontheightdelta
		fires
			= if [ow_fontglyphheight OR ow_fontlineheight ] AND {the
			new font height differs from the previos one}
			= before the parent redraws this widget

	- onpopup
		fires :
			= on calling a popup-menu ( with "RightClick" ), once the menu items of the current level are loaded
			( before building the submenus ) 

	- onresize

		= fires on creating/(changing size)/(min-max restoring) of widget, 
		before actual redrawing

		= rechecks if there's real work to do

	- onshowhint
		= fires when a installed hint is activated or on "aplication.showint" called
		= since called last, allows to adjust the default behavior

	- onbeforeupdateskin
		= fires in "updateskin" ( the widget is loaded etc ) before applying the skin

	- onafterupdateskin
		= fires in "updateskin" ( the widget is loaded etc ) once the skin is applied

TWidget stuff

   Properties:    
		- name
		- anchors
		- bounds
		- color
		- enabled
		- visible
		- <face> : see {any face}
		- <frame> : see {any frame}
	    - hint
	    - helpcontext
	    - tag
	    - taborder
	    - cursor
	    - optionswidget
	    - optionsskin
	    - popupmenu
    
		twidget's event handlers:
    
			- on(de)activate
			- onbeforeupdateskin
			- onafterupdateskin
			- onchildscaled
			- onfontheightdelta
			- on(de)focus
			- onenter
			- onmove
			- onpopup
			- onresize
			- onshowhint
      
	align_glue : 
	  ( outer anchoring mode for widget group, in the align mode )
		- wam_none
		- wam_start
		- wan_center
		- wm_end

	align_leader : 
		the widget ( incl another spacer, splitter or layouter ) against which the alignment applies ( the reference widget )

	align_mode : 
	  ( inner anchoring mode within widget group, in the align mode )
		- wam_none
		- wam_start
		- wan_center
		- wm_end

// Place mode:

      
	place_mindist, place_maxdist:
		- in the place(ment) mode, limits distance between widgets
		  ( these distance once calculated also define side margins if applicable )

	place_mode: 
	  ( outer anchoring mode for widget group, in the place mode )
		- wam_none
		- wam_start
		- wan_center
		- wm_end

	place_options:
		- plo_endmargin
			= to resize a widget so that it "eats" extra space if it occurs
			
			* only applicable in the place mode, with a limiting value of "place_maxdist" and:

			  1) {place_mode <> wam_none}
			or
			  2) {place_mode = wam_end} and {plo_propmargin in place_options}

			For the exact look, see above


		- plo_propmargin
			= виджеты расставляются теснее так, чтобы образовались отступы перед и после,
			  причем расстояние между центрами виджетов было бы таким же, 
			  как и растояние между серединами крайних виджетов и соотв. границами зоны расстановки

		- plo_syncmaxautosize
			= see above

		- plo_synccaptiondistx
			= see above

			  * affects widgets with opposite cp_left/right set as well	
			  * the minimal before-adjustment "captiondist" among all widgets limits "captiondist" for each of the widget
              * don't set cfo_captiondistouter here !

		- plo_synccaptiondisty
			= see above

			  * affects also widgets with opposite cp_top/bottom set	
			  * the minimal before-adjustment "captiondist" amongst all widgets limits "captiondist" for each of the widget

              ! here, don't set "cfo_captiondistouter" for affected widgets !

		- plo_syncpaintwidth
			= see above

		- plo_syncpaintheight
			= see above

		- plo_scalesize
			= see above


	dist_left, dist_right, dist_top, dist_bottom : 
		= margins between most outer edge the layouter and 
		  the corresponding linked widget

		* see "tspacer" for detail

	linkleft,linkright,linktop,linkbottom : see "tspacer"

	options:
		- spao_glueright, spao_gluebottom: 
			= set the adjustment dependencies between the layouter and its link_* widgets

			* see "tspacer" for more details

	// which mode of widget placement to apply - see above
	optionslayout: 
		- lao_alignx
		- lao_aligny
		- lao_placex
		- lao_placey
		- lao_scalewidth
		- lao_scaleheight
		- lao_scaleleft
		- lao_scaletop
		
		* lao_place* & lao_align* can't be combined for one direction

	optionsscale: 
	  
	  * cause the layouter to provide full space for the widgets as long as they expand/shrink/move

		- osc_expandx 
			= allocates more h-space if needed

		- osc_shrinkx
			= removes extra h-space if occurred

		- osc_expandy
			= allocates more v-space if needed

		- osc_shrinky
			= removes extra v-space if occurred

		- osc_invisishrinkx
			= fully h-collapses the layouter if "visible=false" ( run-time only )

		- osc_invisishrinky
			= fully v-collapses the layoter if "visible=false" ( run-time only )

	optionsskin:
		= see <any widget>


	Methods:

		constructor create(aowner: tcomponent); override;

Public stuff

	(f)window: 
		the OS-allocated ( root = toplevel ) window common for all widgets of this window
		
		* "widget.fwindow.fowner = widget.self" in case of the widget present the root "fwindow" 
		  ( owns the window )

	(f)rootpos: 
		position of the widget in the coord of toplevel window not the nearest parent widget alone,
		calculated as sum of such positions ( fwidgetrect.pos ) starting from the toplevel through the
                chain of all parents up to the current widget;
		"nullpoint" (0,0) for toplevel widgets ( window-owning forms,..)

	screenpos:
		- coord aginst the top-left corner of screen
		- WM decoration & title aren't parts of the widget !

	widgetrect: 
		the widget on-screen area including its frame & frame caption

	paintrect: 
		the widget on-screen area except its frame & frame caption

	clientrect: 
		virtual area which 
			- for non-scrolling widgets, equals to "paintrect", with its "pos:= (0,0)"
			- for scrolling widgets, may be bigger than "paintrect", 
		 	  also may shift ( change its "pos" ) when scrolling

			* "t*grid" aren't such scrollable widgets since their virtual height would be limited by 
			  the X11 "+-32000" limitation, 
			  so example of such widgets are tscrollbox, "tform.container" etc

	framerect: 
		the widget on-screen area except its frame caption but including inner & outer frame

	****************

	// releases all thread locks then post the event to the app event queue and
	// waits for the event handler finishes ( signalled by "sye_ok on a semaphore )
	// finally restores the locks
    // true if the handler is not aborted
	function synchronizeevent(const aevent: tsynchronizeevent): boolean;

    // translates "point" coord against "source" widgetrect to "dest" widgetrect
	//
	//   * nil "source" = from screen coord 
	//   * nil "dest" = to screen coord
	procedure translatewidgetpoint1(var point: pointty; const source,dest: twidget);

	// the function-framed version of "translatewidgetpoint1"
	function translatewidgetpoint(const point: pointty; const source,dest: twidget): pointty;

	// rect isntead of point, 
	// if dest = nil then to screen 
    // if source = nil then against screen
	function translatewidgetrect(const rect: rectty; const source,dest: twidget): rectty;
	//-----------------
    // translates "point" coord against "source" paintrect to "dest" paintrect
	//   * nil "source" = from screen coord 
	//   * nil "dest" = to screen coord
	procedure translatepaintpoint1(var point: pointty; const source,dest: twidget);

	// the function-framed version of "translatepaintpoint1"
	function translatepaintpoint(const point: pointty; const source,dest: twidget): pointty;

	// rect isntead of point, 
	// if dest = nil then to screen 
    // if source = nil then against screen
	function translatepaintrect(const rect: rectty;const source,dest: twidget): rectty;
    //-----------------
    // translates "point" coord against "source" clientrect to "dest" clienttrect
	//   * nil "source" = from screen coord 
	//   * nil "dest" = to screen coord
	procedure translateclientpoint1(var point: pointty;
                    const source,dest: twidget);

	// the function-framed version of "translateclientpoint1"
	function translateclientpoint(const point: pointty; const source,dest: twidget): pointty;

	// rect isntead of point, 
	// if dest = nil then to screen 
    // if source = nil then against screen
	function translateclientrect(const rect: rectty; const source,dest: twidget): rectty;
    //-----------------

	// (re)sorts "awidgets" in order of increasing their "widgetrect.x" coords
	//   - if parent = nil then the coords are against individual parent of each of "awidgets"
	//   - if parent is supplied then the coords are against this parent
	procedure sortwidgetsxorder(var awidgets: widgetarty; const parent: twidget = nil);

	// (re)sorts "awidgets" in order of increasing their "widgetrect.y" coords
	//   - if parent = nil then the coords are against individual parent of each of "awidgets"
	//   - if parent is supplied then the coords are against this parent
	procedure sortwidgetsyorder(var awidgets: widgetarty; const parent: twidget = nil);

	// for each  of "widgets", calculates its autosized client area ( min size rect to fit the caption, etc )
    //   - both hor & ver sizes of client area of each of "widgets" are adjusted to the max of the above calculated areas,
	//	   as the result - client areas of all widgets become identically v+h sized
    // 
    //   * right & bottom anchored margins of each widget are preserved
	procedure syncmaxautosize(const widgets: array of twidget);

	// for each  of "widgets", width of client area of each of "widgets" is adjusted so that 
    // external ( by the outer border of frame ) widths of all widgets become identical 
    // to the external widht of the widest widget
    //    
    //   * if "awidth" >= 0 then no determining the widest widget is taken and
    //     "awidth" is adjusted to instead, for all widgets
    //   * right anchored margins of each widget are lost
	procedure syncminframewidth(const awidgets: array of twidget;
                               const awidth: integer = -1);

	// for each  of "widgets", height of client area of each of "widgets" is adjusted so that 
    // external ( by the outer border of frame ) heights of all widgets become identical 
    // to the external height of the highest widget
    //    
    //   * if "aheight" >= 0 then no determining the highest widget is taken and
    //     "aheight" is adjusted to instead, for all widgets
    //   * bottom anchored margins of each widget are lost
	procedure syncminframeheight(const awidgets: array of twidget; const aheight: integer = -1);

Projects using MSEgui